Motorola Solutions 89FC5794 Enhanced Base Transceiver System (EBTS) User Manual Quad BR 800 Tx FCC Filing

Motorola Solutions, Inc. Enhanced Base Transceiver System (EBTS) Quad BR 800 Tx FCC Filing

89FC5794 User Manual PDF Download & Text

Exhibit D Users Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	133969
Application ID	9M3O3RSdTCtpJr2L5SuI5w==
Document Description	Exhibit D Users Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	318.34kB (3979275 bits)
Date Submitted	2001-01-25 00:00:00
Date Available	2001-01-25 00:00:00
Creation Date	2001-01-15 20:39:54
Producing Software	Acrobat PDFWriter 4.0 for Windows NT
Document Lastmod	2001-01-15 20:45:24
Document Title	Quad-BR_800_Tx_FCC_Filing.PDF
Document Creator	Microsoft Word - Quad-BR_800_Tx_FCC_Filing.doc
Document Author:	kenw

APPLICANT: MOTOROLA INC.
EQUIPMENT TYPE: ABZ89FC5794
INSTRUCTION MANUALS
The instruction and service manual for this base radio are not published at this time. However, draft copy of the
manual is available and has been included as part of the filing package in the form of an electronic pdf document.
Upon request, published and/or printed manuals will be sent to the commission and/or telecommunication
certification body (TCB) as soon as they become available. All of the descriptions and schematics included this
filing package are up to date.
EXHIBIT 8
APPLICANT: MOTOROLA INC.
EQUIPMENT TYPE: ABZ89FC5794
TUNE-UP PROCEDURE
There is no field tune-up procedure. All adjustments are software controlled and are pre-set at the factory. Certain
station operating parameters can be changed via man-machine interface (MMI) commands, within predetermined
limits. Examples include transmit / receiver operating frequencies and power level.
EXHIBIT 9
Network Solutions Sector
ENHANCED BASE TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM (EBTS)
VOLUME 2 OF 3
BASE RADIOS
© 2000 Motorola, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
68P81099E10-D
ECCN 5E992
FCC INTERFERENCE WARNING
The FCC requires that manuals pertaining to Class A computing devices must contain warnings about possible interference with local residential radio and TV reception. This
warning reads as follows:
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of
this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
INDUSTRY OF CANADA NOTICE OF COMPLIANCE
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
COMMERCIAL WARRANTY (STANDARD)
Motorola radio communications products (the “Product”) is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of ONE (1) YEAR (except for crystals and
channel elements which are warranted for a period of ten (10 years) from the date of shipment. Parts including crystals and channel elements, will be replaced free of charge for
the full warranty period but the labor to replace defective parts will only be provided for One Hundred-Twenty (120) days from the date of shipment. Thereafter purchaser must
pay for the labor involved in repairing the Product or replacing the parts at the prevailing rates together with any transportation charges to or from the place where warranty
service is provided. This express warranty is extended by Motorola, 1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 to the original end use purchaser only, and only to
those purchasing for purpose of leasing or solely for commercial, industrial, or governmental use.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WHICH ARE SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES TO
THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.
In the event of a defect, malfunction or failure to conform to specifications established by Motorola, or if appropriate to specifications accepted by Motorola in writing, during the
period shown, Motorola, at its option, will either repair or replace the product or refund the purchase price thereof. Repair at Motorola's option, may include the replacement of
parts or boards with functionally equivalent reconditioned or new parts or boards. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty
period. All replaced parts or product shall become the property of Motorola.
This express commercial warranty is extended by Motorola to the original end user purchaser or lessee only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the
complete warranty for the Product manufactured by Motorola. Motorola assume no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and
signed by an officer of Motorola. Unless made in a separate agreement between Motorola and the original end user purchaser, Motorola does not warrant the installation,
maintenance or service of the Products.
Motorola cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by Motorola which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of
the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use Product is unique, Motorola
disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty.
This warranty does not cover:
a) Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner.
b) Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water or neglect
c) Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance installation, alteration, modification, or adjusting.
d) Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship.
e) A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs (including without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-Motorola supplied
equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim.
f) Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible.
g) A Product which, due to illegal to unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with Motorola's published specifications or
the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from Motorola.
This warranty sets forth the full extent of Motorola's responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase date, at Motorola’s option is the
exclusive remedy. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE,
LOSS OR TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.
SOFTWARE NOTICE/WARRANTY
Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies
and distribute copies of such Motorola software. Motorola software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such
Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including without limitation alteration, modification,
reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such Motorola software or exercise of rights in such Motorola software is permitted. No license is granted by implication,
estoppel or otherwise under Motorola patent rights or copyrights.
This warranty extends only to individual products: batteries are excluded, but carry their own separate limited warranty.
In order to obtain performance of this warranty, purchaser must contact its Motorola salesperson or Motorola at the address first above shown, attention Quality Assurance
Department.
This warranty applies only within the fifty (50) United States and the District of Columbia.
1 Contents
Contents.......................................................................................................................... i
List of Figures .............................................................................................................. iv
List of Tables ................................................................................................................ vi
Foreword................................................................................................................................. ix
General Safety Information .................................................................................................... xi
800/900/1500 MHz
Base Radio Overview............................................................................................... 1-1
Single Carrier Base Radio Overview.................................................................................... 1-4
QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview ................................................................................ 1-9
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469;
1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425 ................................................ 2-1
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller ............................................................. 2-12
800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337;
900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357;
1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428................................................................................... 5-1
QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter ....................................................................................... 5-7
QUAD-Channel Power Amplifiers: 40W, 800 MHz – TLF2020 (TTF1580);
70W, 800 MHz – TLN3335 (CTF1040);
60W, 900 MHz – CLN1355 (CLF1300);
40W, 1500 MHz – TLN3426;
800 MHz QUAD – CLF1400 ...................................................................................... 6-1
Theory of Operation ............................................................................................................. 6-6
DC Power Supply for QUAD Channel Base Radios ............................................... 7-1
QUAD CHANNEL DC Power Supply................................................................................. 7-4
AC Power Supply ....................................................................................................... 8-1
800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283;
900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356 ............................................................................ 9-1
1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427 .......................................................................................... 9-8
Network Solutions Sector
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 9E10- D 4/1/2000- UP
1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196
Contents
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;.............................................................. 9-12
Troubleshooting Single Channel Base Radios .................................................... 10-1
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures ..................................................... 10-5
Station Verification Procedures.......................................................................................... 10-9
Single Channel BR Backplane.......................................................................................... 10-35
Troubleshooting QUAD Channel Base Radios ..................................................... 11-1
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures ..................................................... 11-5
Station Verification Procedures........................................................................................ 11-10
QUAD Channel BR Backplane ........................................................................................ 11-22
QUAD Base Radio Signals............................................................................................... 11-35
Transmitter & Receiver Verification Procedures for Beta- Release Equipment 12-1
Acronyms .....................................................................................................................13
Index .................................................................................................................... Index-1
ii
68P81099E10-D-C 4/1/2000
Contents
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
iii
68P81099E10-D 4/1/2000
Contents
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure:1-1
Base Radio (Typical) ..................................................................................................................... 1-4
Figure:1-2
QUAD Channel Base Radio (Typical) .......................................................................................... 1-9
Figure:1-3
Figure:1-4
800/900 MHz Base Radio Functional Block Diagram ................................................................ 1-15
1500 MHz Base Radio Functional Block Diagram ..................................................................... 1-16
Figure:1-5
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Functional Block Diagram ............................................ 1-17
Figure:2-1
Figure:2-2
Figure:2-3
Figure:2-4
Figure:2-5
Figure:2-6
Base Radio Controller, version CLN1469 (with cover removed) ................................................. 2-2
Base Radio Controller, version TLN3425 (with cover removed).................................................. 2-2
BR Controller (Front View)........................................................................................................... 2-3
Base Radio Controller, version CLN1469 (with cover removed) ............................................... 2-12
BR Controller (Front View)......................................................................................................... 2-13
800/900 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 2) ................................................................................................................................2-23
800/900 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2) ................................................................................................................................2-24
1500 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 2) ................................................................................................................................2-25
1500 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) ............................. 2-26
QUAD CHANNEL Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 2) ................................................................................................................................2-27
QUAD CHANNEL Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2) ................................................................................................................................2-28
800/900 MHz Exciter (with cover removed) ................................................................................. 5-2
1500 MHz Exciter, version TLN3428 (with top removed) ........................................................... 5-3
800 MHz QUAD Channel Exciter (with cover removed) ............................................................. 5-7
Exciter Functional Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 3-11
Exciter Functional Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 3-12
Exciter Functional Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 3-13
Exciter Functional Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 3-14
70W, 800 MHz PA – TLN3335 (with cover removed) ................................................................. 6-2
60W, 900 MHz PA – CLN1355 (with cover removed)................................................................. 6-3
40W, 1500 PA (with cover removed) ............................................................................................ 6-4
QUAD Channel PA (with cover removed).................................................................................... 6-5
TLF2020 (TTF1580B) 40 W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 1)................................................................................................................................ 4-13
TLN3335 (CTF1040) 70 W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 1)................................................................................................................................ 4-14
60W, 900 MHz Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 1)................................................................................................................................ 4-15
Figure:2-6
Figure:2-7
Figure:2-8
Figure:2-7
Figure:2-7
Figure:3-1
Figure:3-2
Figure:3-3
Figure:3-4
Figure:3-5
Figure:3-6
Figure:3-7
Figure:4-1
Figure:4-2
Figure:4-3
Figure:4-4
Figure:4-5
Figure:4-6
Figure:4-7
iv
68P81099E10-D 1/15/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Contents
List of Figures
Figure:4-8
Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram............................................................................... 4-16
Figure:4-9
QUAD Channel Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 1) ............................. 6-17
Figure:5-1
Figure:5-2
DC Power Supply .......................................................................................................................... 7-2
Quad Carrier Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 7-4
Figure:5-3
DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 2) ..................................................................................................................................7-7
DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2) ..................................................................................................................................7-8
QUAD Channel DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 2).................................................................................................................................. 7-9
Figure:5-3
Figure:5-3
Figure:5-3
Figure:6-1
Figure:6-2
Figure:6-2
Figure:7-1
Figure:7-2
Figure:7-3
Figure:7-4
Figure:7-5
Figure:7-6
Figure:7-7
Figure:8-1
Figure:8-2
Figure:8-3
Figure:8-4
Figure:8-5
Figure:8-6
Figure:8-7
Figure:9-1
Figure:9-2
Figure:9-3
Figure:9-4
Figure:10-1
QUAD Channel DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2) ................................................................................................................................7-10
AC Power Supply (front view) ...................................................................................................... 8-2
AC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)........................................................ 8-5
AC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2) ..................................................................................................................................8-6
QUAD Channel Receiver (with cover removed)........................................................................... 9-1
Receiver (with top removed) ......................................................................................................... 9-8
3X Receiver (with cover removed).............................................................................................. 9-12
3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram...................................................................................... 9-17
Receiver Functional Block Diagram............................................................................................ 9-18
3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram...................................................................................... 9-19
Receiver Functional Block Diagram............................................................................................ 9-20
Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart...................................................................................... 10-3
Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart...................................................................................... 10-4
Transmitted Signal Spectrum (800 MHz BR) ........................................................................... 10-15
Transmitted Signal Spectrum (800 MHz BR) ........................................................................... 10-19
Transmitted Signal Spectrum (900 MHz BR) ........................................................................... 10-23
Transmitted Signal Spectrum (1500 MHz BR) ......................................................................... 10-27
Base Radio Backplane Connectors ............................................................................................ 10-37
Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart...................................................................................... 11-3
Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart...................................................................................... 11-4
Quad Channel Spectrum (800 MHz BR) ................................................................................... 11-16
Base Radio Backplane Connectors ............................................................................................ 11-23
Quad Channel Spectrum (800 MHz BR) ..................................................................................... 12-5
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 9E10- D 1/15/2000
Contents
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
List of Tables
List of Tables
vi
Table 1-1
Chapter Topics ............................................................................................................................... 1-1
Table 1-2
BR General Specifications............................................................................................................. 1-5
Table 1-3
Table 1-4
Transmit Specifications ................................................................................................................. 1-6
Receive Specifications ................................................................................................................... 1-6
Table 1-5
QUAD Channel BR General Specifications ................................................................................ 1-10
Table 1-6
Table 1-7
Table 2-1
Table 2-2
Table 2-3
Table 2-4
Table 2-5
Table 2-6
Table 2-7
Table 2-8
Table 2-9
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 4-1
Table 5-1
Table 5-2
Table 5-3
Table 5-4
Table 5-5
Table 5-6
Table 6-1
Table 6-2
Table 6-3
Table 7-1
Table 7-2
Table 7-3
Table 7-4
Table 7-5
Table 7-6
Table 7-7
Table 8-1
Table 8-2
Transmit Specifications ............................................................................................................... 1-11
Receive Specifications ................................................................................................................. 1-11
BR Controller Indicators................................................................................................................ 2-3
BR Controller Controls .................................................................................................................. 2-4
Pin-outs for the STATUS Connector............................................................................................. 2-5
BR Controller Circuitry ................................................................................................................. 2-5
Host Glue ASIC Functions ............................................................................................................ 2-6
BR Controller Indicators.............................................................................................................. 2-13
BR Controller Controls ................................................................................................................ 2-14
Pin-outs for the STATUS Connector........................................................................................... 2-15
BR Controller Circuitry ............................................................................................................... 2-15
Exciter Circuitry............................................................................................................................. 5-4
Exciter Circuitry............................................................................................................................. 5-8
Power Amplifier Circuitry ............................................................................................................. 6-6
DC Power Supply Indicators ......................................................................................................... 7-1
DC Power Supply Specifications................................................................................................... 7-2
DC Power Supply Circuitry ........................................................................................................... 7-3
DC Power Supply Indicators ......................................................................................................... 7-5
DC Power Supply Specifications................................................................................................... 7-5
DC Power Supply Circuitry ........................................................................................................... 7-6
AC Power Supply Indicators ......................................................................................................... 8-1
AC Power Supply Specifications................................................................................................... 8-2
AC Power Supply Circuitry ........................................................................................................... 8-3
Receiver FRUs ............................................................................................................................... 9-2
800 MHz Base Radio Receiver Board/BR Backplane Compatibility ........................................... 9-2
900 MHz Base Radio Receiver Board/BR Backplane Compatibility ........................................... 9-2
Receiver ROM Compatibility ........................................................................................................ 9-3
Receiver Circuitry.......................................................................................................................... 9-5
Receiver Circuitry and Functions .................................................................................................. 9-9
Receiver Circuitry........................................................................................................................ 9-14
Recommended Test Equipment ................................................................................................... 10-2
40W, 800 MHz PA Transmitter Parameters .............................................................................. 10-13
68P81099E10-D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Contents
List of Tables
Table 8-3
70W, 800 MHz PA Transmitter Parameters .............................................................................. 10-17
Table 8-4
60W, 900 MHz PA – CLN1355 Transmitter Parameters .......................................................... 10-21
Table 8-5
Table 8-6
40W, 1500 MHz PA Transmitter Parameters ............................................................................ 10-25
Base Radio Backplane Connectors ............................................................................................ 10-35
Table 8-7
Color Codes for RF Connections on Rear of Base Radio.......................................................... 10-37
Table 8
P1 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-38
Table 9
P1 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-38
Table 10
Table 11
P2 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-39
P3 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-39
Table 12
P2 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-40
Table 13
Table 14
Table 15
Table 16
Table 17
Table 18
P3 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-40
P5 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-40
P6 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-41
P7 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-42
P8 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-43
P13 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................. 10-43
Table 19
Table 20
Table 21
Table 22
Table 23
Table 8-24
Table 9-1
Table 9-2
Table 9-3
Table 9-9
Table 9-10
Table 9-11
Table 9-12
Table 9-13
Table 9-14
Table 9-15
Table 9-16
Table 9-17
SMA Connectors- Receivers...................................................................................................... 10-43
Blind Mates - BRC..................................................................................................................... 10-43
Blind Mates - Exciter ................................................................................................................. 10-43
Blind Mates - PA ....................................................................................................................... 10-44
P9 Connector Pin-outs ............................................................................................................... 10-44
Base Radio Signal Descriptions................................................................................................. 10-47
Recommended Test Equipment ................................................................................................... 11-2
QUAD BRTransmitter Parameters ............................................................................................ 11-14
Backplane Connectors ............................................................................................................... 11-22
RX1 P2 Pinout, Signal and Power ............................................................................................. 11-26
RX1 P3 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection..................................................................... 11-26
RX2 P4 Pinout, Signal and Power ............................................................................................. 11-27
RX2 P5 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection..................................................................... 11-27
RX3 P6 Pinout, Signal and Power ............................................................................................. 11-28
RX3 P7 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection..................................................................... 11-28
RX4 P8 Pinout, Signal and Power ............................................................................................. 11-29
RX4 P9 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection..................................................................... 11-29
PA P10 Pinout, Signal and Power.............................................................................................. 11-30
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 9E10- D 4/1/2000
vii
Contents
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
viii
68P81099E10-D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Foreword
Foreword
About This Manual
Volume 2 of the Enhanced Base Transceiver System (EBTS) manual, Base Radios,
provides the experienced service technician with an overview of the EBTS
operation and functions, and contains information regarding the 800 MHz,
900 MHz, or 1500 MHz base radios.
The EBTS System has three major components:
❐
integrated Site Controller (iSC)
❐
Base Radios (BRs)
❐
RF Distribution System (RFDS)
Installation and testing is described in Volume 1, System Installation and Testing,
and RFDS are described in Volume 3, RF Distribution Systems (RFDS). Detailed
information about the iSC is contained in the iSC Supplement Manual,
68P81098E05.
The information in this manual is current as of the printing date. If changes to
this manual occur after the printing date, they will be documented and issued as
Schaumburg Manual Revisions (SMRs).
Target Audience
The target audience of this document includes Þeld service technicians
responsible for installing, maintaining, and troubleshooting the EBTS.
In keeping with MotorolaÕs Þeld replaceable unit (FRU) philosophy, this manual
provides sufÞcient functional information to the FRU level. Please refer to the
appropriate section of this manual for removal and replacement instructions.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 9E10-D 4/ 1/ 2000
ix
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Foreword
Maintenance Philosophy
The EBTS has been designed using a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) maintenance
concept. To minimize system down time, faulty FRUs may be quickly and easily
replaced with replacement FRUs. This helps to restore normal system operation
quickly.
Due to the high percentage of surface mount components and multi-layer circuit
boards, Þeld repair is discouraged. Faulty or suspectFRUs should be returned to
the Motorola Customer Support Center for further troubleshooting and repair.
Each FRU has a bar code label attached to its front panel. This label identiÞes a
sequential serial number for the FRU. Log this number whenever contacting the
Motorola Customer Support Center. For complete information on ordering
replacement FRUs, or instructions on how to return faulty FRUs for repair,
contact:
Nippon Motorola LTD.
Tokyo Service Center
044-366-8860
OR
Motorola Customer Support Center
1311 East Algonquin Road
Schaumburg, Illinois 60196
(800) 448-3245 or (847) 576-7300
Technical Support Service
Motorola provides technical support services for installation, optimization, and
maintenance of its Þxed network equipment. Before calling the Motorola
Customer Support Center, please note the following information:
❐
Where the system is located.
❐
The date the system was put into service.
❐
A brief description of problem.
❐
Any other unusual circumstances.
6 8 P8 1 0 9 9 E1 0 - D 4 / 1 / 2 0 0 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
General Safety Information
General Safety Information
The United States Department of Labor, through the provisions of the
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), has established an
electromagnetic energy safety standard which applies to the use of this
equipment.
Proper use of this radio will result in exposure below the OSHA limit, however,
this applies only within the United States of America. Obey all electromagnetic
energy safety standards that have been established by your local governing body.
The following precautions are always recommended:
❐
DO NOT operate the transmitter of a mobile radio when someone outside
the vehicle is within two feet (0.6 meter) of the antenna.
❐
DO NOT operate the transmitter of a Þxed radio (base station, microwave
and rural telephone rf equipment) or marine radio when someone is within
two feet (0.6 meter) of the antenna.
❐
DO NOT operate the transmitter of any radio unless all RF connectors are
secure and any open connectors are properly terminated.
❐
DO NOT operate this equipment near electrical caps or in an explosive
atmosphere.
All equipment must be properly grounded according to Motorola installation
instructions for safe operation.
All equipment should be serviced only by a qualiÞed technician.
Refer to the appropriate section of the product service manual for additional
pertinent safety information.
WARNING
POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD. BEFORE
ATTEMPTING REMOVAL OR INSTALLATION OF
EQUIPMENT, MAKE SURE THE PRIMARY POWER AND
BATTERIES ARE DISCONNECTED.
Refer to publication 68P81106E84, Safe Handling of CMOS Integrated Circuit
Devices, for more detailed information on this subject.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 9E10-D 4/ 1/ 2000
xi
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
xii
6 8 P8 1 0 9 9 E1 0 - D 4 / 1 / 2 0 0 0
1 800/900/1500 MHz
Base Radio Overview
Overview
This section provides technical information for the 800/900/1500 MHz Base
Radio (BR). Table 1-1 describes covered topics.
Table 1-1
Chapter Topics
Page
Description
Single Carrier Base Radio Overview
1-3
Provides an overview of the BR, performance speciÞcations,
and overall theory of operation
QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview
1-8
Provides an overview of the QUAD Channel BR,
performance speciÞcations, and overall theory of operation
Base Radio Controller
2-1
Describes the functions and characteristics of the Base Radio
Controller (BRC) module
Exciter
3-1
Describes the functions and characteristics of the
Exciter module
Power AmpliÞer
4-1
Describes the functions and characteristics of Single Channel
and QUAD Channel Power AmpliÞer modules
DC Power Supply
5-21
Describes functions and characteristics of DC Power Supply
modules for Single Channel andQUAD Channel Base Radios
AC Power Supply
6-33
Describes the functions and characteristics of the AC Power
Supply module
Chapter
Network Solutions Sector
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D 11/9/2000- UP
1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196
1-1
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Table 1-1
Chapter Topics
Page
Chapter
Description
Receiver
7-39
Describes the functions and characteristics of the 800 MHz
and 900 MHz 3X Receiver modules
Troubleshooting Single Channel Base Radios
8-1
Provides troubleshooting procedures, replacement
procedures, and receiver/transmitter veriÞcation tests for
Single Channel Base Radios
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures
8-5
Provides instructions and guidelines for Single Channel Base
Radio and Base Radio FRU Replacement
Station VeriÞcation Procedures
8-9
Provides procedures for verifying station operation
following Single Channel Base Radio repairs
Single Channel BR Backplane
8-35
DeÞnes the pinouts, connectors, and signal names for the
Single Channel BR backplane
Troubleshooting QUAD Channel Base Radios
9-1
Provides troubleshooting procedures, replacement
procedures, and receiver/transmitter veriÞcation tests for
QUAD Channel base radios
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures
9-5
Provides instructions and guidelines for QUAD Channel
Base Radio and Base Radio FRU Replacement
Station VeriÞcation Procedures
9-10
Provides procedures for verifying station operation
following QUAD Channel Base Radio repairs
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
9-22
DeÞnes the pinouts, connectors, and signal names for the
QUAD Channel BR backplane
Acronyms
A-39
DeÞnes technical terms that appear in this manual
NOTE
The Þrst section covers the 800 MHz, 900 MHz and
1500 MHz versions of the Base Radio (BR).
Generalinformation for all versions appears here. The
text notes information speciÞc to the 800 MHz , 900
MHz or 1500 MHz BR.
NOTE
For QUAD Channel BR use, all Single Carrier BR
modules have undergone a redesign process. Single
Carrier BR modules are incompatible with the QUAD
Channel BR. QUAD Channel BR modules are
incompatible with the Single Carrier BR.
Do not try to insert QUAD Channel BR modules into a
Single Carrier BR or Single Carrier BR modules into a
QUAD Channel BR.
1-2
68P81095E02- D 11/9/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Single Carrier Base Radio Overview
Single Carrier Base Radio Overview
The BR provides reliable digital BR capabilities in a compact software-controlled
design. Increased channel capacity is provided through voice compression
techniques and Time Division Multiplexing (TDM).
The BR contains the Þve FRUs listed below:
❐
Base Radio Controller (BRC)
❐
Exciter
❐
Power AmpliÞer
❐
Power Supply (AC/DC)
❐
Receiver
The modular design of the BR also offers increased shielding and provides easy
handling. All FRUs connect to the backplane through blindmate connectors.
Figure 1-1 shows the front view of the BR.
3X RECEIVER
INSERT ONLY IN SLOT RX2 WITH BACKPLANE 0183625X
POWER SUPPLY
EXCITER
STATUS
B R P S E X P A C T L R 1 R 2 RESET
R3
CONTROL
POWER AMPLIFIER
EBTS282
101497JNM
Figure:1-1
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
Base Radio (Typical)
1-3
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Single Carrier Base Radio Overview
Controls and Indicators
The Power Supply and BRC contain controls and indicators that provide a means
for monitoring various status and operating conditions of the BR, and also aid in
fault isolation. The controls and indicators for both modules are discussed in the
Power Supply and BRC sections of this chapter.
The Power Supply contains two front panel indicators; the BRC contains eight
front panel indicators. The Power Supply contains a power switch used to apply
power to the BR. The BRC contains a RESET switch used to reset the BR.
Performance Specifications
General Specifications
Table 1-2 lists general speciÞcations for the BR.
Table 1-2
BR General Specifications
Specification
Value or Range
Dimensions:
Height
5 EIA Rack Units (RU)
Width
19" (482.6 mm)
Depth
16.75" (425 mm)
Weight
76 lbs. (34 kg)
Operating Temperature
32û to 104û F (0û to 40û C)
Storage Temperature
-22û to 140û F (-30û to 60û C)
Rx Frequency Range:
800 MHz iDEN
806 - 821 MHz
900 MHz iDEN
896 - 901 MHz
1500 MHz iDEN
1453 - 1465 MHz
Tx Frequency Range:
800 MHz iDEN
851 - 866 MHz
900 MHz iDEN
935 - 940 MHz
1500 MHz iDEN
1501 - 1513 MHz
Tx Ð Rx Spacing:
800 MHz iDEN
45 MHz
900 MHz iDEN
39 MHz
1500 MHz iDEN
48 MHz
Channel Spacing
25 kHz
Frequency Generation
Synthesized
Digital Modulation
M-16QAM
Power Supply Inputs:
Vac (option)
90 - 140/180 - 230 Vac (@ 47 - 63 Hz)
Vdc
-48 Vdc (41 - 60 Vdc)
Diversity Branches
1-4
Up to 3
68P81095E02- D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Single Carrier Base Radio Overview
Transmit Specifications
Table 1-3 lists transmit speciÞcations for the BR.
Table 1-3
Transmit Specifications
Specification
Value or Range
Average Power Output:
(800 MHz) 40 W PA
2 - 40 W
(800 MHz) 70 W PA
4 - 70 W
(900 MHz) 60 W PA
5 - 60 W
(1500 MHz) 40 W PA
10 - 40 W
Transmit Bit Error Rate (BER)
0.01%
Occupied Bandwidth
18.5 kHz
Frequency Stability *
1.5 ppm
RF Input Impedance
50 Ω (nom.)
FCC Designation (FCC Rule Part 90):
(800 MHz) 40 W PA
ABZ89FC5772
(800 MHz) 70 W PA
ABZ89FC5763
(900 MHz) 60 W PA
ABZ89FC5791
* Stability without site reference connected to station.
Receive Specifications
Table 1-4 lists the receive speciÞcations.
Table 1-4
Receive Specifications
Specification
Value or Range
Static Sensitivity :
800 MHz BR
-108 dBm (BER = 8%)
900 MHz BR
-109 dBm (BER = 10%)
1500 MHz BR
-98 dBm (BER = 1%)
BER Floor (BER = 0.01%)
≥ -80 dBm
IF Frequencies
1st IF (All bands):
73.35 MHz (1st IF)
2nd IF:
800/900 MHz
450 kHz (2nd IF)
1500 MHz
455 kHz (2nd IF)
Frequency Stability *
1.5 ppm
RF Input Impedance
50 Ω (nom.)
FCC Designation (FCC Rule Part 15):
800 MHz BR
ABZ89FR5762
900 MHz BR
ABZ89FR5792
† Measurement referenced from single receiver input port of BR.
* Stability without site reference connected to station.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
1-5
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Single Carrier Base Radio Overview
NOTE
FCC Compliance Notice: The Base Radio (BR) is FCC
Compliant only when used in conjunction with
Motorola supplied RF Distribution Systems. Motorola
does not recommend that this BR be used without a
Motorola approved RF Distribution System. It is the
customerÕs responsibility to Þle for FCC approval if
the BR is used with a non-Motorola supplied RF
Distribution System.
Theory of Operation
The BR operates in conjunction with other site controllers and equipment that are
properly terminated. The following description assumes such a conÞguration.
Figures 1-3 and 1-4 show an overall block diagram of the BR.
Power is applied to the AC Power or DC Power inputs located on the BR
backplane. The DC Power input is connected if -48 Vdc or batteries are used in
the site. The AC Power input is used when 120/240 Vac service is used as a
power source within the site.
Power is applied to the BR by setting the Power Supply power switch to the on
position. Upon power-up, the BR performs self-diagnostic tests to ensure the
integrity of the unit. These tests are primarily conÞned to the BRC and include
memory and Ethernet veriÞcation routines.
After the self-diagnostic tests are complete, the BR reports any alarm conditions
present on any of its modules to the site controller via Ethernet. Alarm conditions
may also be veriÞed locally using service computer and the STATUS port located
on the front of the BRC.
The software resident in EPROM on the BRC registers the BR with the site
controller via Ethernet. Once registered, the BR software is downloaded via
Ethernet and is executed from RAM. Operating parameters for the BR are
included in this download. This software allows the BR to perform call
processing functions.
The BR operates in a TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) mode. This mode,
combined with voice compression techniques, provides an increased channel
capacity ratio of as much as 6 to 1. Both the receive and transmit signals of the BR
are divided into 6 individual time slots. Each receive slot has a corresponding
transmit slot; this pair of slots comprises a logical RF channel.
The BR uses diversity reception for increased coverage area and improved
quality. The Receiver module within the BR contains up to three receivers. Two
Receivers are used with two-branch diversity sites, and three Receivers are used
with three-branch diversity sites.
1-6
68P81095E02- D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Single Carrier Base Radio Overview
All Receivers within a given BR are programmed to the same receive frequency.
The signals from each receiver are fed to the BRC where a diversity combining
algorithm is performed on the signals. The resultant signal is processed for error
correction and then sent to the site controller via Ethernet with the appropriate
control information regarding its destination.
The transmit section of the BR is comprised of two separate FRUs, the Exciter and
Power AmpliÞer (PA). Several PA FRUs are available, covering different
applications and power levels; these are individually discussed as applicable in
later subsections.
The Exciter processes the information to transmit from the BRC in the proper
modulation format. This low level signal is sent to the PA where it is ampliÞed to
the desired output power level. The PA is a continuous keyed linear ampliÞer. A
power control routine monitors the output power of the BR and adjusts it as
necessary to maintain the proper output level.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
1-7
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview
QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview
The QUAD Channel BR provides reliable, digital BR capabilities in a compact,
software-controlled design. Voice compression techniques, time division
multiplexing (TDM) and multi-carrier operation provide increased channel
capacity.
The QUAD Channel BR contains the Þve FRUs listed below:
❐
QUAD Channel EX / Cntl
❐
QUAD Channel Power AmpliÞer
❐
QUAD Channel Power Supply (DC)
❐
QUAD Channel Receiver (qty 4)
The modular design of the QUAD Channel BR also offers increased shielding and
provides easy handling. All FRUs connect to the backplane through blindmate
connectors. Figure 1-2 shows the front view of the BR.
Figure:1-2
1-8
QUAD Channel Base Radio (Typical)
68P81095E02- D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview
Controls and Indicators
Power Supply and EX / CNTL controls and indicators monitor BR status and
operating conditions, and also aid in fault isolation. The Power Supply and EX /
CNTL sections of this chapter discuss controls and indicators for both modules.
The Power Supply has two front panel indicators. The EX / CNTL has twelve
front panel indicators. The Power Supply power switch applies power to the BR.
The EX / CNTL RESET switch resets the BR.
Performance Specifications
General Specifications
Table 1-5 lists general speciÞcations for the BR.
QUAD Channel BR General Specifications
Table 1-5
Value or Range
Specification
Dimensions:
Height
5 EIA Rack Units (RU)
Width
19" (482.6 mm)
Depth
16.75" (425 mm)
Weight
91 lbs. (40 kg)
Operating Temperature
32û to 104û F (0û to 40û C)
Storage Temperature
-22û to 140û F (-30û to 60û C)
Rx Frequency Range:
800 MHz iDEN
806 - 825 MHz
Tx Frequency Range:
800 MHz iDEN
851 - 870 MHz
Tx Ð Rx Spacing:
800 MHz iDEN
Carrier Spacing
Carrier
Capacitya
45 MHz
25 kHz
1, 2, 3 or 4
Frequency Generation
Synthesized
Digital Modulation
QPSK, M-16QAM, and M-64QAM
Power Supply Inputs:
Vdc
Diversity Branches
-48 Vdc (41 - 60 Vdc)
Up to 3
a. Multi-carrier operation must utilize adjacent, contiguous RF carriers.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
1-9
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview
Transmit Specifications
Table 1-6 lists the BR transmit speciÞcations.
Table 1-6
Transmit Specifications
Specification
Average Power Output:
Value or Range
Total PA
Per Carrier
(800 MHz)Single Carrier
5 - 52 W
5 - 52 W
(800 MHz) Dual Carrier
5 - 52 W
2.5 - 26 W
(800 MHz) Triple Carrier
5 - 48 W
1.7 - 16 W
(800 MHz) QUAD Channel
5 - 42 W
Transmit Bit Error Rate (BER)
0.01%
Occupied Bandwidth
18.5 kHz
Frequency Stability *
1.5 ppm
RF Input Impedance
50 Ω (nom.)
FCC Designation (FCC Rule Part 90):
(800 MHz) QUAD Channel PA
ABZ89FC5794
* Transmit frequency stability locks to an external site refernce, which controls ultimate frequency stability to a
level of 50 ppb.
Receive Specifications
Table 1-7 lists the receive speciÞcations.
Table 1-7
Receive Specifications
Specification
Value or Range
Static Sensitivity :
800 MHz BR
BER Floor (BER = 0.01%)
-108 dBm (BER = 8%)
≥ -80 dBm
IF Frequencies
1st IF (All bands):
73.35 MHz (1st IF)
2nd IF:
450 kHz (2nd IF)
Frequency Stability *
1.5 ppm
RF Input Impedance
50 Ω (nom.)
FCC Designation (FCC Rule Part 15):
800 MHz BR
ABZ89FR5793
† Measurement referenced from single receiver input port of BR.
* Stability without site reference connected to station. Receive frequency stability locks to an external site
refernce, which controls ultimate frequency stability to a level of 50 ppb.
1-10
68P81095E02- D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview
NOTE
FCC Compliance Notice: The Base Radio (BR) is FCC
Compliant only when used with Motorola-supplied
RF Distribution Systems. Motorola does not
recommend using this BR without a Motorolaapproved RF Distribution System. If customer uses
the BR with a non-Motorola supplied RF Distribution
System, the customer is responsible for Þling for FCC
approval.
Theory of Operation
The QUAD Channel BR operates together with other site controllers and
equipment that are properly terminated. The following description assumes such
a conÞguration. Figures 1-5 show an overall block diagram of the QUAD Channel
BR.
Power is applied to the DC Power inputs located on the QUAD Channel BR
backplane. The DC Power input is connected if -48 Vdc or batteries are used in the
site.
Power is applied to the BR by setting the Power Supply power switch to the on
position. Upon power-up, the QUAD Channel BR performs self-diagnostic tests
to ensure the integrity of the unit. These tests, which include memory and
Ethernet veriÞcation routines, primarily examine the EX / CN TL.
After completing self-diagnostic tests, the QUAD Channel BR reports alarm
conditions on any of its modules to the site controller via Ethernet. Alarm
conditions may also be veriÞed locally. Local veriÞcation involves using the
service computer and the STATUS port located on the front of the QUAD Channel
EX / CNTL.
The software resident in FLASH on the EX / CNTL registers the BR with the site
controller via Ethernet. After BR registration on initial power-up, the BR software
downloads via Ethernet and executes from RAM. The download includes
operating parameters for the QUAD Channel BR. These parameters allow the
QUAD Channel BR to perform call processing functions.
After software downloads to the BR via Ethernet, FLASH memory stores the
software object. Upon future power-ups, the software object in FLASH loads into
RAM for execution.
The BR operates in a TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) mode. This mode,
combined with voice compression techniques, increases channel capacity by a
ratio of as much as six to one. TDMA divides both the receive and transmit
signals of the BR into six individual time slots. Each receive slot has a
corresponding transmit slot. This pair of slots comprises a logical RF channel.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
1-11
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview
The BR uses diversity reception for increased coverage area and improved
quality. The Receiver modules within the QUAD Channel BR contain three
receiver paths. Two-branch diversity sites use two Receiver paths, and
three-branch diversity sites use three Receiver paths.
All Receiver paths within a given Receiver module are programmed to the same
receive frequency. Signals from each receiver arrive at the EX / CNTL module.
This module performs a diversity combining algorithm on the signals. The
resultant signal undergoes an error-correction process. Then, via Ethernet, the site
controller acquires the signal, along with control information about signal
destination.
Two separate FRUs comprise the transmit section of the QUAD Channel BR.
These are the Exciter portion of the EX / CNTL and the Power AmpliÞer (PA).
The Exciter processes commands from the CNTL, assuring transmission in the
proper modulation format. Then the low-level signal enters the PA. The PA
ampliÞes this signal to the desired output power level. The PA is a continuously
keyed linear ampliÞer. A power control routine monitors the output power of the
BR. The routine adjusts the power as necessary to maintain the proper output
level.
1-12
68P81095E02- D 11/9/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
1-13
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel Base Radio Overview
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
1-14
68P81095E02- D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Base Radio Overview
800 MHz And 900 MHz
Base Radio
3X RECEIVER MODULE
MIXER
FROM
RFDS
(RECEIVER
ANTENNA)
#1
RF IN
FROM
RFDS
(RECEIVER
ANTENNA)
#2
RF IN
FROM
RFDS
(RECEIVER
ANTENNA)
#3
RF IN
Functional Block Diagram
DSP BUS
LPF/
PRESELECT/
PREAMP/
IMAGE FILTER
BAND
PASS
FILTER
IF
AMP
BAND
PASS
FILTER
DIGITAL
ATTEN.
CIRCUIT
CUSTOM
RECEIVER
IC
BAND
PASS
FILTER
IF
AMP
BAND
PASS
FILTER
DIGITAL
ATTEN.
CIRCUIT
CUSTOM
RECEIVER
IC
IF
AMP
BAND
PASS
FILTER
DIGITAL
ATTEN.
CIRCUIT
CUSTOM
RECEIVER
IC
MIXER
DSP BUS
LPF/
PRESELECT/
PREAMP/
IMAGE FILTER
DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
MIXER
BAND
PASS
FILTER
AGC
ADDRESS DECODE,
MEMORY,
A/D CONVERTER
267 KHZ
START-UP
INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
133 KHZ
SERIAL BUS
3-WAY
SPLITTER
SPI BUS
+14.2 V
INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
2.1 MHZ
+5 V
INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
SPI BUS
5 MHZ
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
EXTERNAL
DC INPUT
41 - 72 VDC
133 KHZ
CLOCK
GENERATOR
CIRCUITRY
VCO/
SYNTH
INPUT FILTER
BOARD
MAIN INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
DSP BUS
LPF/
PRESELECT/
PREAMP/
IMAGE FILTER
+14.2 VDC
TO BACKPLANE
+5 VDC
TO BACKPLANE
+28 VDC
TO BACKPLANE
5 MHZ
16.8 MHZ
ETHERNET
INTERFACE
HOST
GLUE
ASIC
TRANSMIT
DSP
TO/FROM
RS-232 PORT
(ON BACKPLANE)
HOST
µP
NON-VOLATILE
MEMORY
(EEPROM,
EPROM)
TISIC
EXCITER MODULE
SSI
SCI
TO/FROM
STATUS
PORT
(RS-232)
SPI BUS
RECEIVE
DSP
DRAM
SRAM
970 MHZ
(1025 MHZ)
VCO/SYNTH
FREQUENCY
DOUBLER
SPI BUS
TRANLIN
IC
DATA/CLOCK
POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE
SPI BUS
2.1 MHZ
PLL/
VCO
SPI BUS
TO/FROM
ETHERNET
SPI BUS
DATA/CLOCK
BASE RADIO CONTROLLER
MODULE
SPI BUS
DIAGNOSTICS
CIRCUITRY
IF IN
ADDRESS DECODE,
MEMORY, A/D CONVERTER
237 MHZ
(180.6 MHZ)
VCO
IF OUT
ADDRESS DECODE,
MEMORY, A/D CONVERTER
TO
RFDS
(TRANSMIT
ANTENNA)
RF OUT
EXCITER
IC
RF FEEDBACK
COMBINER
FEEDBACK IN
RF OUT
FINAL
LINEAR
AMPS
SPLITTER
LINEAR
DRIVER
RF IN
LINEAR RF
AMPLIFIER
NOTES:
1. 2-Branch systems must have a 50Ω load (P/N 5882106P03) installed on Antenna Port #3.
2. Set the RX_FRU_CONFIG parameter as follows:
2-Branch Systems: 12
3-Branch Systems: 123
3. Where two frequencies are given, frequency without parentheses applies to 800 MHz BR only and frequency with parentheses applies to 900 MHz BR only.
EBTS284
120497JNM
Figure:1-3
68 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
11/9/2000
800/900 MHz Base Radio Functional Block Diagram
1-15
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Base Radio Overview
1500 MHz Base Radio
RECEIVER MODULE
RECEIVE
ANTENNA
Functional Block Diagram
RECEIVER MODULE
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
TLN3429/TLN3339/TLN3338
RECEIVER MODULE
TLN3427
MIXER
RF IN
BAND
PASS
FILTER
IF
AMP
DIGITAL
ATTEN.
CIRCUIT
BAND
PASS
FILTER
CUSTOM
RECEIVER
IC
SPI BUS
2X INJECTION
AMP
BATTERY CHARGING/
REVERT CIRCUITRY
AGC
ADDRESS DECODE,
MEMORY,
A/D CONVERTER
SPI BUS
CLOCK
GENERATOR
CIRCUITRY
START-UP
INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
133 KHZ
+14.2 V
INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
2.1 MHZ
+5 V
INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
SPI BUS
5 MHZ
5 MHZ
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
16.8 MHZ
HOST
µP
NON-VOLATILE
MEMORY
(EEPROM, SRAM,
EPROM)
DRAM
SSI
TRANSMIT
DSP
SCI
TO/FROM
SERVICE
COMPUTER
CORRECTION SIGNALS
HOST
ASIC
SPI BUS
DSP
GLUE
ASIC
EXCITER MODULE
TLN3428
RECEIVE
DSP
ERROR
CORRECTION
DSP
2.1 MHZ
PLL/
VCO
SPI BUS
SPI BUS
SPI BUS
ETHERNET
INTERFACE
TO/FROM
SYNC MODEM
+5 VDC
TO BACKPLANE
TO/FROM STORAGE
BATTERY
DATA/CLOCK
TO/FROM
ETHERNET
+14.2 VDC
TO BACKPLANE
+28 VDC
TO BACKPLANE
DIAGNOSTICS
CIRCUITRY
BASE RADIO CONTROLLER
MODULE
CLN1469/TLN3425
AC INPUT
47 - 63 HZ
90V/264V
133 KHZ (TLN3338)
67 KHZ (TLN3429/
TLN3339)
267 KHZ
SERIAL BUS
SYNTH/
VCO
INPUT FILTER
BOARD
MAIN INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
DSP BUS
LPF/
PRESELECT/
PERAMP/
IMAGE FILTER
700 MHZ
VCO/SYNTH
FREQUENCY
DOUBLER
SPI BUS
(TLN3425 ONLY)
ADDRESS DECODE,
MEMORY, A/D CONVERTER
TRANLIN
IC
DATA/CLOCK
236 MHZ
VCO
TRANSMIT
ANTENNA
IF IN
POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE
TLN3426
IF OUT
SPI BUS
EXCITER
IC
ADDRESS DECODE,
MEMORY, A/D CONVERTER
RF OUT
RF FEEDBACK
COMBINER
FEEDBACK IN
RF OUT
FINAL
LINEAR
AMP
AGC
CIRCUIT
SPLITTER
LINEAR
DRIVER
RF IN
LINEAR RF
AMPLIFIER
FINAL
LINEAR
AMP
Battery Charging/Revert Circuitry is contained only in the TLN3429 and TLN3339 AC Power Supplies.
Figure:1-4
1-16
1500 MHz Base Radio Functional Block Diagram
68P 81095E 02-D
11/ 9/ 2000
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
MIXER
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
VCO SYNTH
SPLITTER
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
MIXER
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
PREAMPLIFIER
SPLITTER
/ BYPASS
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
RX3 DATA
16.8MHz
RX4 DATA
Host SPI
RECEIVER 3
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
MIXER
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
RF IN
PREAMPLIFIER
SPLITTER
/ BYPASS
FROM RFDS
(BRANCH 3)
MIXER
RECEIVER 2
RX1 DATA
MIXER
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
MIXER
RECEIVE
DSP
RX SPI
RF IN
PREAMPLIFIER
SPLITTER
/ BYPASS
BUFFERS
HOST
u’P
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
SDRAM
RECEIVE
DSP
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
RX INTERFACE,
ADDRESS DECODE.
MEMORY, DIAGNOSTICS
VCO SYNTH
SPLITTER
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
SPI BUS
EXCITER-BASE RADIO
CONTROLLER
STATUS
PORT
RS-232
MIXER
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
RX2 DATA
Rx1&2
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
Rx3&4
RX INTERFACE,
ADDRESS DECODE.
MEMORY, DIAGNOSTICS
RECEIVER 4
MIXER
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
QUAD RX IN DISTRIBUTION
Base Radio Overview
FROM RFDS
(BRANCH 2)
IO LATCHES
MIXER
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
RX INTERFACE,
ADDRESS DECODE.
MEMORY, DIAGNOSTICS
VCO SYNTH
SPLITTER
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
16.8MHz
1PPS & SLOT TIMING
SPI BUS
FLASH
ETHERNET
INTERFACE
ETHERNET
5 MHZ
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
TRANSMIT
DSP
RF IN
TX RECLOCK
2.4MHz
48MHz
Tx_I
FROM RFDS
(BRANCH 1)
PREAMPLIFIER
SPLITTER
/ BYPASS
MIXER
LINEAR RF
AMPLIFIER
ODCT
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
RX INTERFACE,
ADDRESS DECODE.
MEMORY, DIAGNOSTICS
VCO SYNTH
SPLITTER
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
ABACUS
RECEIVER
IC
Tx_Q
SPI BUS
Exciter
Host SPI
IF FILTER
AMP, AGC
MIXER
EEPROM
PLL/VCOs
MIXER
LPF, AMP,
FILTER
TISIC
16.8MHz
BASE RADIO
CONTROLLER
RECEIVER 1
DAC
POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE
RF OUT
VCOs/Synths
COMBINER
SPI BUS
ADDRESS DECODE,
MEMORY, ADC
TO RFDS
(TX ANTENNA)
RF FEEDBACK
DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
EXTERNAL
DC INPUT
41 - 60 VDC
LINEAR
DRIVER
SPLITTER
FINAL
LINEAR
AMPS
ADDRESS DECODE,
MEMORY, ADC
Figure:1-5
133 KHZ
+28 VDC
TO BACKPLANE
Main Converter
INPUT FILTER
START-UP
INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
1-17
RF IN
CLOCK
GENERATOR
14.2 V
CONVERTER
267 KHZ
133 KHZ
3.3 V
CONVERTER
+14.2 VDC
TO BACKPLANE
+3.3 VDC
TO BACKPLANE
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Functional Block
Diagram
68P 81095E 02-D
11/ 9/ 2000
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Base Radio Overview
1-18
68P 81095E 02-D
11/ 9/ 2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
2 Base Radio Controller
Overview
This section provides technical information for the Base Radio Controller (BRC).
Table 2-1 describes covered topics.
Table 2-1
Chapter Topics
Chapter
Page
Description
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller Ð
CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller Ð
TLN3425
2-2
Describes the functions and characteristics of the Base Radio
Controller (BRC) module for the single channel Base Radio
(BR).
800 MHz QUAD Channel
Base Radio Controller
2-13
Describes the functions and characteristics of the Base Radio
Controller (BRC) module for the QUAD channel Base Radio
(BR).
Single Channel Base Radio Controller
2-25
Functional Block Diagram for the Single Channel Base Radio
Controller (BRC)
QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
2-29
Functional Block Diagram for the QUAD Channel Base
Radio Controller (BRC)
FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Reference
Base Radio Controller (BRC) Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) are available for the
iDEN EBTS. The FRU contains the BRC kit and required packaging. Table 2-2
provides a cross reference between BRC FRU numbers and kit numbers.
Table 2-2
FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Referece
Description
FRU Number
Kit Number
Single Channel Base Radio Controller
(800/ 900/ 1500 MHz)
TLN3334
CLN1469
Single Channel Base Radio Controller
(1500 MHz MCI)
TLN3425
CLN1472
QUAD Channel Exciter/Base Radio Controller
(800 MHz)
CLN1497
CLF1560
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
2-1
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469;
1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
Overview
The Base Radio Controller (BRC) provides signal processing and operational
control for other Base Radio modules. Figure 2-1 shows a top view of the BRC
with the cover removed. The BRC module consists of two printed circuit boards
(BRC board and LED/display board), a slide-in housing, and associated
hardware.
The BRC memory contains the operating software and codeplug. The software
deÞnes operating parameters for the BR, such as output power and operating
frequency.
The BRC interconnects to the Base Radio backplane using one 96-pin, DIN
connector and one blindmate, RF connector. Two Torx screws secure the BRC to
the Base Radio chassis.
NOTE
BRC Modules with board level kit number CLN6989
require System Software Release version SR 3.3 or
higher. Using these modules with System Software
versions older than 3.3 causes a PENDULUM lock
error. The Base Radio will not function.
Two BRC modules serve as the main controller for the 1500 MHz Base Radio. The
standard model is the same module that the 800/900 MHz Base Radio uses.
Model TLN3425 contains additional Digital Signal Processing power. This
additional power supports applications that require a modiÞed error correction
routine (available for speciÞc customers only). Figure 2-2 shows a top view of the
BRC (model TLN3425) with the cover removed.
2-2
68P81095E02- D 12/6/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
Figure:2-1
Base Radio Controller, version CLN1469 (with cover removed)
1.5GHZ-A859
Figure:2-2
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
Base Radio Controller, version TLN3425 (with cover removed)
2-3
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
Controls and Indicators
The BRC monitors the functions of other Base Radio modules. Front panel LEDs
indicate the status of modules that the BRC monitors. Upon initial power-up, all
front panel LEDs normally ßash three times. A RESET switch allows a manual
reset of the Base Radio. Figure 2-3 shows the BRC front panel.
STATUS
CONTROL
B R P S E X P A C T L R 1 R 2 RESET
R3
EBTS316
122796JNM
Figure:2-3
BR Controller (Front View)
Indicators
Table 2-3 lists and describes the BRC LEDs.
Table 2-3
LED
Color
BR
Green
PS
2-4
BR Controller Indicators
Red
Module
Monitored
Condition
BR
Solid (on)
Station is keyed
Flashing (on)
Station is not keyed
Off
Station is out of service or power is
removed
Solid (on)
FRU failure indication - Power Supply has
a major alarm, and is out of service
Flashing (on)
Power Supply has a minor alarm, and may
be operating at reduced performance
Off
Power Supply is operating normally (no
alarms)
Power
Supply
Indications
68P81095E02- D 12/6/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
BR Controller Indicators (Continued)
Table 2-3
LED
Color
EX
Red
PA
Red
CTL
R1
Red
Red
R2
Module
Monitored
Condition
Exciter
Solid (on)
FRU failure indication - Exciter has a major
alarm, and is out of service
Flashing (on)
Exciter has a minor alarm, and may be
operating at reduced performance
Off
Exciter is operating normally
(no alarms)
Solid (on)
FRU failure indication - PA has a major
alarm, and is out of service
Flashing (on)
PA has a minor alarm and may be
operating at reduced performance
Off
PA is operating normally (no alarms)
Solid (on)
FRU failure indication - BRC has a major
alarm, and is out of service
Flashing (on)
BRC has a minor alarm, and may be
operating at reduced performance
Off
BRC is operating normally (no alarms)
Solid (on)
FRU failure indication - Receiver (#1, #2,
or #3) has a major alarm, and is out of
service
Flashing (on)
Receiver (#1, #2, or #3) has a minor alarm,
and may be operating at reduced
performance
Off
Receiver (#1, #2, or #3) is operating
normally (no alarms)
Power
AmpliÞer
Controller
Receiver #1,
#2, or #3
R3
Indications
Controls
Table 2-4 lists the controls and descriptions.
Table 2-4
BR Controller Controls
Control
Description
RESET Switch
A push-button switch used to manually reset the BR.
STATUS
connector
A 9-pin connector used for connection of a service computer. Provides a
convenient means for testing and conÞguring.
STATUS Connector
Table 2-5 the pin-outs for the STATUS connector.
68 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
2-5
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
Pin-outs for the STATUS Connector
Table 2-5
Pin-out
Signal
CD
TXD
RXD
not used
GND
not used
CTS
RTS
not used
Theory of Operation
Table 2-6 brießy describes the BRC circuitry. Figures 2-6 and 2-7 are functional
block diagrams of the Single Channel BRC.
BR Controller Circuitry
Table 2-6
Circuit
Description
Host Microprocessor and
Host Glue ASIC
Contains two integrated circuits that comprise the central
controller of the BRC and station.
Non-Volatile Memory
Consists of:
¥ EPROMs containing the station operating software
¥ one EEPROM containing the station codeplug data
2-6
Volatile Memory
Contains DRAM to store station software that executes
commands. Contains SRAM which the host microprocessor
uses for general data space.
Ethernet Interface
Provides the BRC with a 10Base2 Ethernet communication port.
The interface networks both control and compressed voice
data.
RS-232 Interface
Provides the BRC with two independent RS-232 serial
interfaces.
Digital Signal Processors and
TISIC
Performs high-speed modulation/demodulation of
compressed audio and signaling data.
Station Reference Circuitry
Generates the 16.8 MHz and 2.1 MHz reference signal used
throughout the station.
Input Ports
Contains two 16-line input buses. These buses receive
miscellaneous inputs from the BR.
Output Ports
Contains three 16-line output buses. These buses provide a path
for sending miscellaneous control signals to circuits throughout
the BR.
Remote Station Shutdown
Provides software control to cycle power on the BR.
68P81095E02- D 12/6/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
Host Microprocessor
The host microprocessor is the the BRÕs main controller. The host operates at a
clock speed of 16.5 MHz. The Host Glue ASIC provides this clock frequency. The
processor controls Base Radio operation according to station software in
non-volatile memory. Two EPROMs contain the station software. An EEPROM
stores the station codeplug.
Serial Communication Buses
The microprocessor provides a general-purpose SCC2 serial communications bus.
The SCC2 serial communications bus is an asynchronous RS-232 interface. The
the BRC front panel includes a 9-pin, D-type connector. This connector provides a
port where service personnel may connect a service computer. The service
computer allows downloading of application code or diagnostic software. Service
personnel can perform programming and maintenance tasks via Man Machine
Interface (MMI) commands. The interface between the SCC2 port and the front
panel STATUS connector is via EIA-232 Bus Receivers/Drivers.
Address and Data Bus
The microprocessor has a 23-line address bus. The processor uses this bus to
access non-volatile and DRAM memory. The processor also uses the bus to
provide control for other BRC circuitry via memory mapping.
A 16-line data bus transfers data to and from the BRC memory. Such bus transfers
may involve other BRC circuitry, too. Buffers on the data bus allow transfers to
and from non-volatile and DRAM memory.
Host Glue ASIC
The Host Microprocessor controls the operations of the Host Glue ASIC. Table 2-7
describes this ASICÕs functions.
Table 2-7
Host Glue ASIC Functions
Function
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
Description
SPI Bus
Serves as a general-purpose, serial communications bus. Provides
communications between the Host Microprocessor and other Base
Radio modules.
DRAM Controller
Provides signals necessary to access and refresh DRAM memory.
System Reset
Generates a BRC Reset at power-up.
Host Microprocessor
Clock
Buffers the 33 MHz crystal outputs. Performs a divide-by-2 operation.
Outputs a 16.5 MHz clock signal for the Host Microprocessor.
Address Decoding
Decodes addresses from the Host Microprocessor. Generates
corresponding chip-select signals for various BRC devices, such as:
DRAM, EPROM, I/O Ports, DSPs, and internal Host Glue ASIC
registers.
Interrupt Controller
Accepts interrupt signals from various BRC circuits (such as the DSPs).
Organizes the interrupts based on hardware-deÞned priority ranking.
Sends interrupt and priority level information to the Host
Microprocessor (via IPL lines 1-3).
2-7
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
Non-Volatile Memory
The Base Radio software resides in two 512K x 8 byte EPROMs. The Host
Microprocessor addresses these EPROMs via 19 of 23 host address bus lines. The
host accesses EPROM data over the 16-line host data bus.
The data that determines the station personality resides in an 8K x 8 byte
codeplug EEPROM. The microprocessor addresses the EEPROM over 15 of 23
host address bus lines. The host accesses EEPROM data over the 16-line data bus.
Stations ship with default data programmed into the codeplug. The BRC must
download Þeld programming information from network and site controllers. This
data includes operating frequencies and output power level. The station permits
adjustment of many station parameters, but the station does not store
adjustments. Refer to this manualÕs Software Commands chapter for additional
information.
Volatile Memory
Each BRC contains 2MB of DRAM. The BRC downloads station software code
into DRAM for station use. Since DRAM is volatile memory, it loses data during a
system reset or power failure.
DRAM also provides short-term storage for data generated and required during
normal operation. The BRC performs read and write operations over the Host
Address and Data buses. Read and write operations also involve column and row
select lines. The Host Glue ASIC controls these lines. The Host Glue ASIC also
controls address bus and column row signals. During normal operation, the
address bus and column row signals sequentially refresh DRAM memory
locations.
The BRC also includes two 32K x 8 byte fast Static RAM (SRAM) ICs. The
microprocessor accesses SRAM over the Data Bus and Host Address Bus. Access
requires the entire Data Bus, and 15 of the Host Address BusÕ 23 lines.
Ethernet Interface
The Ethernet Interface includes a Local Area Network (LAN) Controller. This
LAN Controller is a 32-bit address, 16-bit data LAN coprocessor. The LAN
coprocessor implements the CSMA/CD access method, which supports the IEEE
802.3 10Base2 standard. The LAN coprocessor communicates with the Host
Microprocessor via DRAM. The LAN coprocessor uses 22 of its 32 address lines
for the Ethernet interface.
The LAN coprocessor supports all IEEE 802.3 Medium Access Control, including
the following:
2-8
❐
framing
❐
preamble generation
❐
stripping
❐
source address generation
❐
destination address checking
68P81095E02- D 12/6/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
The LAN coprocessor receives commands from the CPU by reading a speciÞed
memory block. The LAN ControllerÕs internal FIFOs optimize microprocessor bus
performance.
The LAN coprocessor includes an on-chip, Direct Memory Access (DMA)
controller. The DMA controller automatically transfers data blocks (buffers and
frames) from Ethernet to DRAM. These automatic data transfers relieve the host
CPU of byte transfer overhead.
The Ethernet Serial Interface works with the LAN coprocessor to perform these
major functions:
❐
10 MHz transmit clock generation (obtained by dividing the 20 MHz signal
provided by an on-board crystal)
❐
Manchester encoding and decoding of frames
❐
electrical interface to the Ethernet transceiver
An isolation transformer provides high voltage protection. The transformer also
isolates the Ethernet Serial Interface (ESI) and the transceiver. The pulse
transformer has the following characteristics:
❐
Minimum inductance of 75 µH
❐
2000 V isolation between primary and secondary windings
❐
1:1 Pulse Transformer
The Coaxial Transceiver Interface (CTI) is a coaxial cable line driver/receiver for
the Ethernet. CTI provides a 10Base2 connection via a coaxial connector on the
board. This device minimizes the number of external components necessary for
Ethernet operations.
A DC/DC converter provides a constant voltage of -9 Vdc for the CTI. The
converterÕs input source voltage is 5 Vdc.
The CTI performs the following functions:
❐
Receives and transmits data to the Ethernet coaxial connection
❐
Reports any collision that it detects on the coaxial connection
❐
Disables the transmitter when packets are longer than the legal length
(Jabber Timer)
Digital Signal Processors
The BRC includes a Receive Digital Signal Processor (RXDSP) and a Transmit
Digital Signal Processor (TXDSP). These DSPs and related circuitry process
compressed station transmit and receive audio or data. The related circuitry
includes the TDMA Infrastructure Support IC (TISIC) and the TISIC Interface
Circuitry. The DSPs only accepts input and output signals in digitized form.
The inputs are digitized receiver signals. The outputs are digitized voice audio
and data (modulation signals). The output DSP sends these signals to the Exciter.
DSPs communicate with the Microprocessor via an 8-bit host data bus. This bus is
on the Host Processor side. For all DSPs, interrupts drive communication.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
2-9
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
The RXDSP operates from a 40 MHz clock provided by an on-board crystal. The
RXDSP accepts redigitized signal from the receivers. The RXDSP also provides
address and data buses. These buses receive digitized audio from the TISIC.
The DSP program and signal processing algorithms reside in three 32K x 8 SRAM
ICs. The RXDSP accesses this software there. The RXDSP communicates with the
host bus via an 8-bit interface.
The Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) port offers a serial data path to the TXDSP.
The Serial Communications Interface (SCI) port provides a serial control path
from the TXDSP.
The TXDSP operates at a clock speed of 40 MHz, provided by a clock oscillator.
The TXDSP sends the digitized signal to the TISIC. The TSCI then passes the
signal to the Exciter.
The TXDSP contains its own address and data buses. It uses these buses to access
its DSP program and signal processing algorithms in local memory. The TXDSP
memory consists of six 32K x 8 SRAM ICs. The TXDSP communicates with the
host bus via an 8-bit interface.
Error Correction Digital Signal Processor (TLN3425 Only)
The Error Correction Digital Signal Processor (U30) in the Model TLN3425A
operates at a clock speed of 60 MHz. An on-board oscillator (Y100) operates at 10
MHz. Circuitry inside the ECDSP multiplies this frequency to generate the
required clock signal.
Decoding is the main function of the Error Correction Digital Signal Processor
(ECDSP). The ECDSP accepts data from the Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI)
bus. The ECDSP performs various algorithms on the signal. Then the signal enters
the TXDSP via the SSI bus.
The ECDSP contains its own address and data buses. It uses these buses to access
its DSP program and signal processing algorithms in local memory. Two 32K x 8
SRAM ICs (U27 and U31) comprise the ECDSP memory. The ECDSP
communicates with the host bus via an 8-bit interface.
2-10
68P81095E02- D 12/6/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
TISIC
The TISIC controls internal DSP operations. This circuit provides a number of
functions, including the following:
❐
Interfaces with the DSPs via the DSP address and data buses.
❐
Accepts a 16.8 MHz signal and a 1 PPS signal from Station
Reference Circuitry.
❐
Outputs a 2.1 MHz reference signal used by the Exciter and Receivers.
❐
Outputs a 4.8 MHz reference signal used by the Exciter to clock data into the
TRANLIN IC.
❐
Accepts differential data from the Receiver (RX1 through RX3) via
interface circuitry.
❐
Accepts and sends serial data from the Receiver (RX1 through RX3) via the
serial data bus.
❐
Accepts and formats differential data from the TXDSP for transmission to
the Exciter via interface circuitry.
❐
Generates 15 ms and 7.5 ms ticks. These synchronize to the 1 PPS time mark
from the iSC. The system routes these ticks to the TXDSP and RXDSP,
respectively.
❐
Generates the Receive SSI (RXSSI) frame sync interrupt for the RXDSP.
Station Reference Circuitry
The Station Reference Circuitry is a phase-locked loop (PLL). This PLL consists of
a high-stability, Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator (VCXO) and a Phase Locked
Loop IC. The iSCÕs GPS output connects to the 5 MHz/1 PPS A BNC connector on
the EBTS junction panel.
The PLL compares the reference frequency to the 16.8 MHz VCXO output. The
PLL then generates a DC correction or control voltage. With the control voltage
enable switch closed, the PLLÕs control voltage adjusts the VCXO frequency. This
adjustment achieves a stability equivalent to that of the external 5 MHz frequency
reference.
The control voltage from the PLL continuously frequency-controls the VXCO. The
VXCO outputs a 16.8 MHz clock signal, and applies the signal to the TISIC.
The TISIC divides the 16.8 MHz signal by eight and outputs a 2.1 MHz signal. A
splitter separates and buffers this signal. Then via the backplane, the output
signal enters the Exciter and Receivers as a 2.1 MHz reference .
The 4.8 MHz reference signal generated by the TISIC enters the Exciter module.
There it clocks data into and out of the TRANLIN IC.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
2-11
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio Controller – CLN1469; 1500 MHz MC1 Base Radio Controller – TLN3425
Input Ports
Two general purpose, 16-line input ports provide for various input signals from
the BRC and station circuitry. These inputs connect to the Host Microprocessor.
Input Port P0 -In and Port P1-In each consist of 16 lines. Via the backplane, these
lines carry signals from BRC circuitry and other station modules. The buses
communicate with the buffers to make data available to the Host Microprocessor
via the Host Data Bus. The DIP switch and Station Reference Circuitry are typical
inputs for these ports.
Output Ports
Three general purpose, 16-line output ports provide various control signals from
the Host Microprocessor. Via the backplane, these output ports carry control
signals to the BRC and station circuitry.
Output ports P0-Out through Port P2-Out each consist of 16 lines. These lines
derive from the Host Data Bus via latches.
Typical control signals include front panel LED control signals and SPI peripheral
address select lines.
Remote Station Shutdown
BRC circuitry can send a shutdown pulse to the Base Radio Power Supply. After
receiving this pulse, the power supply cycles BR power. The shutdown affects 5.1
Vdc, 28.6 Vdc and 14.2 Vdc sources. The BRC produces the shutdown pulse by
invoking software control signals. A remote site uses the shutdown function to
perform a hard reset of all BR modules.
2-12
68P81095E02- D 12/6/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
Overview
The Base Radio Controller (BRC) provides signal processing and operational
control for Base Radio modules. The BRC module consists of a printed circuit
board, a slide-in housing, and associated hardware.
The BRC memory contains the operating software and codeplug. The software
deÞnes BR operating parameters, such as output power and operating frequency.
The BRC connects to the Base Radio backplane with one 168-pin FutureBus+
connector and one blindmate RF connector. Two Torx screws secure the BRC in
the Base Radio chassis.
Figure 2-4 shows a top view of the BRC (model CLF6290A) with the cover
removed.
Figure:2-4
Base Radio Controller, version CLN1469 (with cover removed)
Controls and Indicators
The BRC monitors the functions of other Base Radio modules. The LEDs on the
front panel indicate the status of BRC-monitored modules. All LEDs on the BRC
front panel normally ßash three times upon initial power-up. A RESET switch
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
2-13
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
allows a manual reset of the Base Radio. Figure 2-5 shows the front panel of the
BRC.
Figure:2-5
BR Controller (Front View)
Indicators
Table 2-8 lists and describes the BRC LEDs.
Table 2-8
LED
PS
EXBRC
PA
REF
2-14
BR Controller Indicators
Color
Red
Red
Red
Red
Module
Monitored
Condition
Power
Supply
Solid (on)
FRU failure indication - Power Supply
has a major alarm, and is out of service
Flashing (on)
Power Supply has a minor alarm, and
may be operating at reduced
performance
Off
Power Supply is operating normally
(no alarms)
Solid (on)
FRU failure indication - Controller/
Exciter has a major alarm, and is out of
service (Note: Upon power-up of the
BR, this LED indicates a failed mode
until BR software achieves a known
state of operation.)
Flashing (on)
Controller/Exciter has a minor alarm,
and may be operating at reduced
performance
Off
Controller/Exciter is operating
normally (no alarms)
Solid (on)
FRU failure indication - PA has a major
alarm, and is out of service
Flashing (on)
PA has a minor alarm, and may be
operating at reduced performance
Off
PA is operating normally (no alarms)
Solid (on)
FRU failure indication - Controller
Station Reference has a major alarm,
and is out of service
Flashing (on)
BRC has a minor alarm, and may be
operating in a marginal region
Off
BRC is operating normally (no alarms)
Controller/
Exciter
Power
AmpliÞer
Controller
Station
Reference
Indications
68P81095E02- D 12/6/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
Table 2-8
LED
BR Controller Indicators (Continued)
Color
Module
Monitored
Condition
Red
Receiver #1,
#2, #3, or #4
Solid (on)
FRU failure indication - Receiver (#1,
#2, #3 or #4) has a major alarm, and is
out of service
Flashing (on)
Receiver (#1, #2, #3 or #4) has a minor
alarm, and may be operating at
reduced performance
Off
Receiver (#1, #2, #3 or #4) is operating
normally (no alarms)
Solid (on)
Station Transmit Carrier #1 is keyed
Flashing (on)
Station Transmit Carrier #1 is not
keyed
Off
Station is out of service, or power is
removed
Solid (on)
Station Transmit Carrier #2 is keyed
Flashing (on)
Station Transmit Carrier #2 is not
keyed
Off
Station is out of service, or power is
removed
Solid (on)
Station Transmit Carrier #3 is keyed
Flashing (on)
Station Transmit Carrier #3 is not
keyed
Off
Station is out of service, or power is
removed
Solid (on)
Station Transmit Carrier #4 is keyed
Flashing (on)
Station Transmit Carrier #4 is not
keyed
Off
Station is out of service, or power is
removed
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
TX1
Green
TX2
Green
TX3
Green
TX4
Green
BR
BR
BR
BR
Indications
Controls
Table 2-9 lists the controls and descriptions.
Table 2-9
BR Controller Controls
Control
Description
RESET Switch
A push-button switch used to manually reset the BR.
STATUS
connector
A 9-pin connector used for connection of a service computer, providing a
convenient means for testing and conÞguring.
STATUS Connector
Table 2-10 the pin-outs for the STATUS connector.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
2-15
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
Table 2-10
Pin-outs for the STATUS Connector
Pin-out
Signal
not used
TXD
RXD
not used
GND
not used
not used
not used
not used
Theory of Operation
Table 2-11 brießy describes the BRC circuitry. Figure 2-9 is a functional block
diagram of the BRC.
Table 2-11
BR Controller Circuitry
Circuit
Description
Host Microprocessor
Contains integrated circuits that comprise the central controller
of the BRC and station
Non-Volatile Memory
Consists of:
¥ FLASH containing the station operating software
¥ EEPROM containing the station codeplug data
Volatile Memory
2-16
Contains SDRAM to store station software used to execute
commands.
68P81095E02- D 12/6/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
BR Controller Circuitry
Table 2-11
Circuit
Description
Ethernet Interface
Provides the BRC with a 10Base2 Ethernet communication port
to network both control and compressed voice data
RS-232 Interface
Provides the BRC with an RS-232 serial interface
Digital Signal Processors
Performs high-speed modulation/demodulation of
compressed audio and signaling data
TISIC
Contains integrated circuits that provide timing reference
signals for the station
TX Reclock
Contains integrated circuits that provide highly stable,
reclocked transmit signals and peripheral transmit logic
RX DSP SPI
Contains integrated circuits that provide DSP SPI capability
and peripheral transmit logic
Station Reference Circuitry
Generates the 16.8 MHz and 48 MHz reference signals used
throughout the station
Input Ports
Contains 16 signal input ports that receive miscellaneous
inputs from the BR
Output Ports
Contains 40 signal output ports, providing a path for sending
miscellaneous control signals to circuits throughout the BR
Remote Station Shutdown
Provides software control to cycle power on the BR
Host Microprocessor
The host microprocessor is the main controller for the BR. The processor operates
at a 50-MHz clock speed. The processor controls Base Radio operation according
to station software in memory. Station software resides in FLASH memory. For
normal operation, the system transfers this software to non-volatile memory. An
EEPROM contains the station codeplug.
NOTE
At BR power-up, the EXBRC LED indicates a major
alarm. This indication continues until BR software
achieves a predetermined state of operation.
Afterward, the software turns off the EXBRC LED.
Serial Communication Buses
The microprocessor provides a general-purpose SMC serial management
controller bus.
The SMC serial communications bus is an asynchronous RS-232 interface with no
hardware handshake capability. The BRC front panel includes a nine-pin, D-type
connector. This connector provides a port where service personnel may connect a
service computer. Service personnel can perform programming and maintenance
tasks via Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands. The interface between the
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
2-17
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
SMC port and the front- panel STATUS connector is via EIA-232 Bus Receivers
and Drivers.
Host Processor
The microprocessor incorporates 4k bytes of instruction cache and 4k bytes of
data cache that signiÞcantly enhance processor performance.
The microprocessor has a 32-line address bus. The processor uses this bus to
access non-volatile memory and SDRAM memory. Via memory mapping, the
processor also uses this bus to control other BRC circuitry.
The microprocessor uses its Chip Select capability to decode addresses and assert
an output signal. The eight chip-select signals select non-volatile memory,
SDRAM memory, input ports, output ports, and DSPs.
The Host SPI serves as a general-purpose, serial communications bus. This bus...
❐
Provides communications between the Host Microprocessor and other Base
Radio modules.
❐
Provides condition signals necessary to access SDRAM, FLASH, and DSP.
❐
Provides refresh capability to SDRAM memory.
❐
Accepts interrupt signals from BRC circuits (such as DSPs).
❐
Organizes the interrupts, based on hardware-deÞned priority ranking.
The Host supports several internal interrupts from its Communications Processor
Module. These interrupts allow efÞcient use of peripheral interfaces.
The Host supports 10 Mbps Ethernet/IEEE 802.3.
A 32-line data bus transfers data to and from BRC memory and other BRC
circuitry. Buffers on this data bus allow transfers to and from non-volatile and
SDRAM memory.
Non-Volatile Memory
Base Radio software resides in 2M x 32 bytes of FLASH memory. The Host
Microprocessor addresses the FLASH memory with 20 of the host address busÕ 32
lines. The host accesses FLASH data over the 32-line host data bus. A
host-operated chip-select line provides control signals for these transactions.
The FLASH contains the operating system and application code. The system
stores application code in FLASH for fast recovery from reset conditions.
Application code transfers from network or site controllers may occur in a
background mode. Background mode transfers allow the station to remain
operational during new code upgrades.
The data that determines the station personality resides in a 32K x eight byte
codeplug EEPROM. The microprocessor addresses the EEPROM with 15 of the
host address busÕ 32 lines. The host accesses EEPROM data with eight of the data
busÕ 32 lines. A host-operated chip-select line provides control signals for these
transactions.
2-18
68P81095E02- D 12/6/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
During the manufacturing process, the factory programs the codeplugÕs default
data. The BRC must download Þeld programming data from network and site
controllers. This data includes operating frequencies and output power level. The
station permits adjustment of many station parameters, but the station does not
store these adjustments. Refer to the Software Commands chapter for additional
information.
Volatile Memory
Each BRC contains 8MB x 32 bytes of SDRAM. The BRC downloads station
software code into SDRAM for station use. SDRAM also provides short-term
storage for data generated and required during normal operation. SDRAM is
volatile memory. A loss of power or system reset destroys SDRAM data.
The system performs read and write operations over the Host Address and Data
buses. These operations involve column and row select lines under control of the
Host processorÕs DRAM controller. The Host Glue ASICÕs address bus and
column row signals sequentially refresh SDRAM memory locations.
Ethernet Interface
The Host processorÕs Communications Processor Module (CPM) provides the
Local Area Network (LAN) Controller for the Ethernet Interface. The LAN
function implements the CSMA/CD access method, which supports the IEEE
802.3 10Base2 standard.
The LAN coprocessor supports all IEEE 802.3 Medium Access Control, including
the following:
❐
framing
❐
preamble generation
❐
stripping
❐
source address generation
❐
destination address checking
The PCM LAN receives commands from the CPU.
The Ethernet Serial Interface works directly with the CPM LAN to perform the
following major functions:
❐
10 MHz transmit clock generation (obtained by dividing the 20 MHz signal
provided by on-board crystal)
❐
Manchester encoding/decoding of frames
❐
electrical interface to the Ethernet transceiver
An isolation transformer provides high-voltage protection. The transformer also
isolates the Ethernet Serial Interface (ESI) and the transceiver. The pulse
transformer has the following characteristics:
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
❐
Minimum inductance of 75 µH
❐
2000 V isolation between primary and secondary windings
❐
1:1 Pulse Transformer
2-19
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
The Coaxial Transceiver Interface (CTI) is a coaxial cable line driver and receiver
for the Ethernet. CTI provides a 10Base2 connection via a coaxial connector on the
board. This device minimizes the number of external components necessary for
Ethernet operations.
A DC/DC converter provides a constant voltage of -9 Vdc for the CTI from a
3.3 Vdc source.
The CTI performs the following functions:
❐
Receives and transmits data to the Ethernet coaxial connection
❐
Reports any collision that it detects on the coaxial connection
❐
Disables the transmitter when packets are longer than the legal length
(Jabber Timer)
Digital Signal Processors
The BRC includes two Receive Digital Signal Processors (RXDSPs) and a Transmit
Digital Signal Processor (TXDSP). These DSPs and related circuitry process
compressed station transmit and receive audio or data. The related circuitry
includes the TDMA Infrastructure Support IC (TISIC) and the TISIC Interface
Circuitry. The DSPs only accept input and output signals in digitized form.
The inputs are digitized receiver signals. The outputs are digitized voice audio
and data (modulation signals). These signals pass from the DSP to the Exciter
portion of the EXBRC. DSPs communicate with the Microprocessor via an
eight-bit, host data bus on the host processor side. For all DSPs, interrupts drive
communication with the host.
The RXDSPs operate from an external 16.8 MHz clock, provided by the local
station reference. The RXDSP internal operating clock signal is 150MHz,
produced by an internal Phase-Locked Loop (PLL).
The RXDSPs accept digitized signals from the receivers through Enhanced
Synchronous Serial Interface (ESSI) ports. Each of two ESSI ports on a RXDSP
supports a single carrier (single receiver) digital data input. The DSP circuitry
includes two RXDSPs. These allow processing of up to four carriers (four
receivers).
The RXDSP accesses its DSP program and signal-processing algorithms in 128k
words of internal memory. The RXDSPs communicate with the host bus over an
8-bit interface.
Each RXDSP provides serial communications to its respective receiver module for
receiver control via a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). The SPI is a
parallel-to-serial conversion circuit, connected to the RXDSP data bus. Each
RXDSP communicates to two receive modules through this interface.
Additionally, a serial control path connects the two RXDSPs and the TXDSP. The
Synchronous Communications Interface (SCI) port facilitates this serial control
path.
For initialization and control purposes, one RXDSP connects to the TISIC device.
2-20
68P81095E02- D 12/6/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
The TXDSP operates at an external clock speed of 16.8 MHz, provided by the
EXBRC local station reference. The TXDSP internal operating clock is 150MHz,
produced by an internal Phase Lock Loop (PLL).
The TXDSP sends up to four carriers of digitized signal to the EX11 exciter. The
exciter converts the digital signal to analog. Also at the exciter, a highly stable
clock reclocks the digital data. Reclocking enhances transmit signal integrity. Two
framed and synchronized data streams result. One data stream is I-data, and the
other is the Q-data stream.
The TXDSP contains its own, internal address and data memory. The TXDSP can
store 128k words of DSP program and data memory. An eight-bit interface
handles TXDSP-to-host bus communications.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
2-21
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
TISIC
The TISIC controls internal DSP operations. This circuit provides the following
functions:
❐
For initialization and control, interfaces with one RXDSP via the DSP
address and data buses.
❐
Accepts a 16.8 MHz signal from Station Reference Circuitry.
❐
Accepts a 5 MHz signal, modulated with one pulse per second (1 PPS) from
the site reference.
❐
Demodulates the 1 PPS
❐
Outputs a 1 PPS signal and a windowed version of this signal for network
timing alignment.
❐
Outputs a 2.4 MHz reference signal used by the Exciter.l
❐
Generates 15 ms and 7.5 ms ticks. (These ticks synchronize to the 1 PPS time
mark. The system decodes the time mark from the site reference. Then the
system routes the reference to the TXDSP and RXDSPs.)
Station Reference Circuitry
The Station Reference Circuitry is a phase-locked loop (PLL). This PLL consists of
a high-stability, Voltage-Controlled, Crystal Oscillator (VCXO) and a PLL IC. GPS
output from the iSC connects to the 5 MHz/1 PPS BNC connector on the BR
backplane. Wiring at this connector routes signals to EXBRC station reference
circuitry.
The PLL compares the 5 MHz reference frequency to the 16.8 MHz VCXO output.
Then the PLL generates a DC correction voltage. The PLL applies this correction
voltage to the VCO through an analog gate. The analog gate closes when three
conditions coexist: (1) The 5 MHz tests stable. (2) The PLL IC is programmed. (3)
Two PLL oscillator and reference signal output alignments occur.
A loss of the 5 MHz / 1 PPS signal causes the control voltage enable switch to
open. This complex PLL control allows the BR to maintain call-handover
capability during short disconnects (approximately one minute) of the 5 MHz/1
PPS signal. (For example, during 5 MHz/1 PPS cable maintenance work.)
When the gate enables, the control voltage from the PLL can adjust the
high-stability VCXO frequency. The adjustment can achieve a stability nearly
equivalent to that of the external, 5 MHz frequency reference.
The correction voltage from the PLL continuously adjusts the VXCO frequency.
The VXCO outputs a 16.8 MHz clock signal. The circuit applies this clock signal to
the receiver, 48 MHz reference and TISIC.
The receivers use the 16.8MHz as the clock input and synthesizer reference.
The 48 MHz EXBRC synthesizer uses the 16.8 MHz as its synthesizer reference.
The 48 MHz synthesizer output is the clock input for the TXDSP I and Q data
reclock circuitry.
The TISIC divides the 16.8 MHz signal by seven, and outputs a 2.4 MHz signal.
This output signal then becomes the 2.4 MHz reference for the Exciter.
2-22
68P81095E02- D 12/6/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio Controller
Input Ports
One general-purpose input register provides for BRC and station circuit input
signals. The register has 16 input ports. The Host Data Bus conveys input register
data to the Host Microprocessor. Typical inputs include 16.8 and 48 MHz Station
Reference Circuitry status outputs and reset status outputs.
Output Ports
Two general-purpose output registers distribute control signals from the Host
Microprocessor to the BRC and station circuitry. Each register has 40 output ports.
Control signal distribution occurs over the backplane. The Host Data Bus drives
the output portsÕ latched outputs. Typical control signals include front-panel LED
signals and SPI peripheral enable and address lines.
Remote Station Shutdown
The BRC contains power supply shutdown circuitry. This circuitry can send a
shutdown pulse to the Base Radio Power Supply. BRC software generates the
shutdown control pulse.
After receiving a shutdown pulse, the power supply turns off BR power. Shut
down power sources include 3.3, 28.6 and 14.2 Vdc sources throughout the BR.
Due to charges retained by BR storage elements, power supply voltages may not
reach zero. The shutdown only assures that the host processor enters a
power-on-reset state.
A remote site uses the shutdown function to perform a hard reset of all BR
modules.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
12/6/2000
2-23
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
2-24
68P81095E02- D 11/9/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Single Channel Base Radio Controller
HOST MICROPROCESSOR / HOST ASIC
16.5 MHZ CLK
ADDR BUS
FROM
HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
HOST
INTERFACE
A2-A23
DATA BUS
EIA-232
BUS
RECEIVERS/
DRIVERS
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS
D0-D15
LANIIC
COPROCESSOR
ADDR BUS
COPROCESSOR
DATA BUS
ETHERNET
COPROCESSOR
(82596DX)
ETHERNET
SERIAL
INTERFACE
ETHERNET
SERIAL
INTERFACE
RCV
ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
CD
CLSN
RX
TRANSCEIVER
RS-232 PORT
(9 PIN D CONNECTOR
ON BACKPLANE)
HOST ADDRESS BUS
RESET SWITCH
(FRONT PANEL)
VCC
10BASE2
HOST DATA BUS
COAX
TX
TRMT
EIA-232
BUS
RECEIVERS/
DRIVERS
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS
STATUS PORT
(9 PIN D CONNECTOR
ON BRC FRONT PANEL)
33 MHZ
TIMING
CIRCUITRY
BUFFERS
ETHERNET INTERFACE
HOST
GLUE
ASIC
SPI BUS
TO/FROM
STATION MODULES
SPI BUS
HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS
LED CONTROL
LINES
(P/O I/O PORT
P0 OUT)
HOST ADDRESS BUS
BASE
RADIO
POWER
SUPPLY
EXCITER
PA
CTL
R1
R2
R3
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY
DRAM
ADDRESS
FRONT PANEL LEDS
DRAM
1M X 16
HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS
EPROM
512K X 8
COL
SELECT
(CAS*)
A1-A19
28V
I/O PORT
P2 OUT
SHUTDOWN
CIRCUITRY
SHUTDOWN
(TO POWER
SUPPLY)
A1-A19
HOST
ADDRESS
A1-A18
ROW
SELECT
(RAS*)
EPROM
512K X 8
HOST ADDRESS BUS
D0-D15
DRAM ADDRESS
MULTIPLEXER
8K X 8
EEPROM
CODEPLUG
REMOTE STATION
SHUTDOWN CIRCUITRY
A1-A15
DRAM
COLUMN
ADDRESS
D0-D7
BUFFERS
HOST
ADDRESS
1-23
HOST DATA BUS
FROM HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
32K X 8
SRAM
I/O PORT P0 OUT
A1-A15
16
I/O PORT P0 IN
BUFFERS
VARIOUS INPUTS
FROM BRC &
STATION CIRCUITRY
16
I/O PORT P1 IN
I/O PORT P1 OUT
16
BUFFERS
I/O PORT P2 OUT
16
16
A1-A11
VARIOUS
CONTROL
LINES TO BRC &
STATION
CIRCUITRY
D0-D15
BUFFERS
32K X 8
SRAM
A10-A22
DRAM
ROW
ADDRESS
A1-A15
D0-D15
COLUMN/ROW
SELECT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS CIRCUITRY
DRAM MEMORY
EBTS286
Figure:2-6
6 8 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
4/16/99
800/900 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram 010397SN
(Sheet 1 of 2)
2-25
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Base Radio Controller
TISIC INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
TRANSMIT SYNCHRONOUS
SERIAL INTERFACE (TXSSI)
RX1 DATA
DIFFERENTIAL DATA
FROM RECEIVER MODULE #1
VIA BACKPLANE
SYNCHRONOUS
SERIAL INTERFACE (SSI)
SERIAL BUS
HOST
PORT
HOST
ADDRESS
BUS
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
INTERFACE (SCI)
DIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTL
CONVERTER/BUFFER
RX2 DATA
DIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTL
CONVERTER/BUFFER
RX3 DATA
RX2 DATA
32K X 8
FROM
HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
ADDRESS
HOST
DATA
BUS
RX1 DATA
SERIAL BUS
TO/FROM
RECEIVER
MODULE #1
SERIAL BUS
BUFFERS
RX1 SERIAL
DIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTL
CONVERTER/BUFFER
DATA
RAM
DIFFERENTIAL DATA
FROM RECEIVER MODULE #2
VIA BACKPLANE
32K X 8
TRANSMIT
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
(TXDSP)
RAM
SERIAL BUS
32K X 8
SERIAL BUS
TO/FROM
RECEIVER
MODULE #2
SERIAL BUS
BUFFERS
RX2 SERIAL
RAM
32K X 8
RX3 DATA
RAM
32K X 8
DIFFERENTIAL DATA
FROM RECEIVER MODULE #3
VIA BACKPLANE
TISIC
RAM
SERIAL BUS
32K X 8
CLOCK
OSCILLATOR
RAM
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(DSP) / DSP ASIC
SERIAL BUS
BUFFERS
RX3 SERIAL
4.8 MHz TRANLIN CLOCK
TO EXCITER MODULE
VIA BACKPLANE
TTL-TO-DIFFERENTIAL
CONVERTER/BUFFER
4.8 MHz TXLIN
CLOCK
FROM
HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
DIFFERENTIAL DATA
TO EXCITER MODULE
VIA BACKPLANE
TTL-TO-DIFFERENTIAL
CONVERTER/BUFFER
TXLIN
DATA
AGC
HOST
DATA
BUS
SERIAL BUS
TO/FROM
RECEIVER
MODULE #3
TO RECEIVERS (1-3)
HOST
PORT
HOST
ADDRESS
BUS
RECEIVE
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
(RXDSP)
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
INTERFACE (SCI)
RECEIVE SYNCHRONOUS
SERIAL INTERFACE BUS
(RXSSI)
2.1 MHZ
OUT
2.1 MHZ FROM DSP ASIC
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
16.8 MHZ
IN
2.1 MHZ REF TO EXCITER
MODULE VIA BACKPLANE
BUFFER/
SPLITTER
2.1 MHZ REF TO RECEIVER
MODULE #1, 2, 3 VIA BACKPLANE
16.8 MHZ TO ASIC
DSP DATA BUS
SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL
INTERFACE (SSI)
5 MHz/1PPS
BNC CONNECTOR
ON BACKPLANE
DATA
DATA
5 MHZ REF
32K X 8
OSCIN
SPI BUS
FIN
5MHz/1PPS COMBINED SIGNAL
PHASE
LOCKED
LOOP
IC
1PPS
RAM
16.8 MHZ
RESET
HIGH
STABILITY
VCXO
32K X 8
RAM
32K X 8
ENABLE
INPUT
16.8 MHZ TO ASIC
CONTROL VOLTAGE
RAM
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP) / DSP ASIC
STATION REFERENCE CIRCUITRY
CONTROL VOLTAGE
ENABLE SWITCH
EBTS292
122094JNM
Figure:2-7
26
800/900 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2)
68P 81095E 02-D
4/ 16/ 99
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Base Radio Controller
Functional Block Diagram
Model TLN3425
(Includes Front Panel Board)
HOST MICROPROCESSOR / HOST ASIC
16.5 MHZ CLK
ADDR BUS
FROM
HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
20 MHZ
TIMING
CIRCUIT
HOST
INTERFACE
DATA BUS
EIA-232
BUS
RECEIVERS/
DRIVERS
DC/DC
CONVERTER
5 VDC
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS (SCC2)
20 MHz
COPROCESSOR
ADDR BUS
COPROCESSOR
DATA BUS
82596DX
ETHERNET
COPROCESSOR
CD
CLSN
ETHERNET
SERIAL
INTERFACE
ETHERNET
SERIAL
INTERFACE
RCV
ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
TRANSCEIVER
RX
23
HOST DATA BUS
TX
TRMT
RS232
(9 PIN D CONNECTOR
ON BACKPLANE)
HOST ADDRESS BUS
10BASE2
COAX
XMT CLK
(10 MHZ)
EIA-232
BUS
RECEIVERS/
DRIVERS
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS (SCC3)
-9 VDC
HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
STATUS
(9 PIN D CONNECTOR
ON BRC FRONT PANEL)
HOST
ASIC
16
ETHERNET INTERFACE
BUFFERS
33 MHZ
TIMING
CIRCUITRY
SPI BUS
TO/FROM
STATION MODULES
SPI BUS
HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS
LED CONTROL
LINES
(P/O I/O PORT
P0 OUT)
DRAM
ADDRESS
HOST ADDRESS BUS
BASE
RADIO
POWER
SUPPLY
EXCITER
PA
BRC
RX1
RX2
RX3
DRAM
1M X 8
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY
COL
SELECT
(CAS*)
FRONT PANEL LEDS (Part of TRN7769)
EPROM
256K X 8
DRAM
1M X 8
HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS
DRAM
ADDRESS
A1-A18
28V
I/O PORT
P3 OUT
SHUTDOWN
CIRCUITRY
ROW
SELECT
(RAS*)
COL
SELECT
(CAS*)
SHUTDOWN
(TO POWER
SUPPLY)
EPROM
256K X 8
A1-A18
HOST
ADDRESS
A1-A23
HOST ADDRESS BUS
DRAM ADDRESS
MULTIPLEXER
8K X 8
EEPROM
CODEPLUG
REMOTE STATION
SHUTDOWN CIRCUITRY
A1-A15
BUFFERS
HOST
ADDRESS
1-23
HOST DATA BUS
FROM HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
16
LATCHES
BUFFERS
16
I/O PORT P2 OUT
16
I/O PORT P1 IN
VARIOUS
CONTROL
LINES TO BRC &
STATION
CIRCUITRY
8K X 8
SRAM
A1-A13
BUFFERS
A10-A22
I/O PORT P3 OUT
16
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS CIRCUITRY
DRAM
ROW
ADDRESS
8K X 8
SRAM
16
COLUMN/ROW
SELECT
A1-A13
STATIC RAM
Figure:2-8
4/16/99
A1-A11
16
I/O PORT P0 IN
6 8 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
DRAM
COLUMN
ADDRESS
I/O PORT P0 OUT
I/O PORT P1 OUT
VARIOUS INPUTS
FROM BRC &
STATION CIRCUITRY
ROW
SELECT
(RAS*)
DYNAMIC RAM
1500 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 2)
2-27
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Base Radio Controller
Functional Block Diagram
Model TLN3425
(Includes Front Panel Board)
DSP ASIC INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
TRANSMIT SYNCHRONOUS
SERIAL INTERFACE (TXSSI)
40 MHZ
TIMING
CIRCUITRY
RX1 DATA
ADDRESS
SCI
DIFFERENTIAL DATA
FROM RECEIVER MODULE #1
VIA BACKPLANE
32K X 8
DATA
RAM
SERIAL BUS
32K X 8
TRANSMIT
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
SSI
RX1 SERIAL
RAM
32K X 8
SERIAL BUS
TO/FROM
RECEIVER
MODULE #1
SERIAL BUS
BUFFERS
RX1 DATA
DIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTL
CONVERTER/BUFFER
RX2 DATA
RAM
HOST DATA BUS
FROM HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
32K X 8
HOST
PORT
DIFFERENTIAL DATA
FROM RECEIVER MODULE #2
VIA BACKPLANE
RAM
RX2 DATA
DIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTL
CONVERTER/BUFFER
RX3 DATA
32K X 8
LATCH ADDRESS
BUS
SERIAL BUS
RAM
RX2 SERIAL
32K X 8
RX3 DATA
DSP
GLUE
ASIC
10 MHZ TIMING
CIRCUITRY
SERIAL BUS
TO/FROM
RECEIVER
MODULE #2
SERIAL BUS
BUFFERS
RAM
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP) / DSP ASIC
DIFFERENTIAL DATA
FROM RECEIVER MODULE #3
VIA BACKPLANE
ADDRESS
SERIAL BUS
HOST DATA BUS
FROM HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
RX3 SERIAL
32K X 8
SERIAL BUS
TO/FROM
RECEIVER
MODULE #3
SERIAL BUS
BUFFERS
DATA
SSI
RAM
TTL-TO-DIFFERENTIAL
CONVERTER/BUFFER
SSI
TXLIN
DATA
ERROR
CORRECTION
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
LATCH
HOST ADDRESS
BUS FROM HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
DIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTL
CONVERTER/BUFFER
32K X 8
DIFFERENTIAL DATA
TO EXCITER MODULE
VIA BACKPLANE
TTL-TO-DIFFERENTIAL
CONVERTER/BUFFER
TXLIN
CLOCK
DIFFERENTIAL DATA
TO EXCITER MODULE
VIA BACKPLANE
RAM
AGC
TO RECEIVER
VIA BACKPLANE
AGC
LATCH ADDRESS BUS
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP) / DSP ASIC
LATCH ADDRESS
BUS
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
HOST
PORT
HOST DATA BUS
FROM HOST
MICROPROCESSOR
DSP DATA BUS
DATA
DATA
RECEIVE
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
SSI
RAM
32K X 8
SCI
RAM
2.1 MHZ REF TO RECEIVER
MODULE #1, 2, 3 VIA BACKPLANE
16.8 MHZ TO ASIC
1 PPS
1 PPS
IN
32K X 8
2.1 MHZ
OUT
16.8 MHZ
IN
5 MHZ FROM
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
(FOR NETTING
PENDULUM)
1 PPS
STRIPPER
PAL
BNC CONNECTOR
ON BACKPLANE
OSC
IN
PHASE
LOCKED
LOOP IC
FIN
32K X 8
SPI BUS
40 MHZ
TIMING
CIRCUITRY
RECEIVE SYNCHRONOUS
SERIAL INTERFACE BUS
(RXSSI)
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP) / DSP ASIC
28
5 MHZ REF
SPI BUS
RAM
Figure:2-9
2.1 MHZ REF TO EXCITER
MODULE VIA BACKPLANE
BUFFER/
SPLITTER
2.1 MHZ FROM DSP ASIC
STATION REFERENCE CIRCUITRY
HIGH
STABILITY
VCO
16.8 MHZ
16.8 MHZ TO ASIC
CONTROL VOLTAGE
ENABLE SWITCH
CONTROL VOLTAGE
FREQUENCY NET ENABLE
(I/O PORT P1 OUT)
1500 MHz Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2)
68P 81095E 02-D
4/ 16/ 99
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Base Radio Controller
QUAD Channel Base
Radio Controller
Functional Block Diagram
LED
CONTROL
LINES
HOST
LATCH
P0 OUT
12
3.3V
POWER
SUPPLY
EXCITER/
CONTROL
PA
REF
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
P0_OUT
TX4
FRONT PANEL LEDS
REMOTE STATION
SHUTDOWN CIRCUITRY
5MHZ_1PPS
BASE RADIO
INPUT
5MHZ
1PPS
SHUTDOWN
(TO POWER
SUPPLY)
SHUTDOWN
CIRCUITRY
SYNTHESIZER
IC / CIRCUITRY
PHASE
DETECTION/
FILTERING/
CONTROL
SPI
BUS
STEARING
LINE
HIGH
STABILITY
VCXO
16.8 MHZ
16.8MHZ
DISCONNECT/
CONNECT
CONTROL
SYNTHESIZER
IC / CIRCUITRY
PHASE
DETECTION/
FILTERING
STEARING
LINE
HIGH
STABILITY
VCXO
48 MHZ
SPI
BUS
TRANSMIT REFERENCE CIRCUITRY
STATION REFERENCE CIRCUITRY
Figure:2-10 QUAD CHANNEL Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 2)
68 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
12/4/2000
2--29
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Base Radio Controller
QUAD Channel
Base Radio Controller
Functional Block Diagram
SERIAL MANAGEMENT CONTROLLER (SMC2)
SCC1
ETHERNET
SERIAL
INTERFACE
EIA-232
BUS
RECEIVERS/
DRIVERS
STATUS PORT
(9 PIN D CONNECTOR
ON BRC FRONT PANEL)
RX1 SERIAL DATA
DIFFERENTIAL
TO SINGLE END
RX2 SERIAL DATA
DIFFERENTIAL
TO SINGLE END
RX3 SERIAL DATA
DIFFERENTIAL
TO SINGLE END
RX4 SERIAL DATA
DIFFERENTIAL
TO SINGLE END
ETHERNET INTERFACE
CLSN
ETHERNET
SERIAL
INTERFACE
CD
RCV
RX
ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
TRMT
TRANSCEIVER
10BASE2
COAX
TX
RECEIVE
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
(RX DSP 2)
D[16:23]
RECEIVE
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
(RX DSP 1)
SPI BUS TO
RECEIVER 3 & 4
PARALLEL
TO SERIAL
CIRCUITRY
D[16:23]
SPI BUS TO
RECEIVER 1 & 2
D[0, 23]
2.4 MHz
TO EXCITER
D[0, 8:23]
TISIC
A[0:5]
1 PPS TIMING, CONTROL/ SLOT TIMING/RESET
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
SPI BUS
TO/FROM
STATION MODULES
BUFFER
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
CIRCUITRY
SPI
BUS
NETWORKED
SCI
HOST ADDRESS BUS
EXTENDED HOST
BUS BUFFERS
A[10:31]
HOST
A[0:7]
MICROPROCESSOR
GPLA0, A[8,9,17,18,20:29],RAS,CAS,WE
5MHZ
1PPS
FRONT PANEL
RESET
16
16
BUFFER
DRAM MEMORY
16.8MHZ
HOST-DSP BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS
MA[21:0]
CS2
CS3
SDRAM
4M x 16
HOST-DSP BUFFERED DATA BUS
BUFFER
D[0:15]
SDRAM
4M x 16
D[0:15]
16
16
DSP_A[31:24]
BUFFER
SDRAM
4M x 16
SDRAM
4M x 16
D[16:31]
16
D[16:31]
D[0:31]
BUFFER
16
TRANSMIT
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
(TX DSP)
MD[31:0]
D[0:31]
BUFFER
16
16
HOST DATA BUS
D[0:7]
CS4
BUFFER
MD[0:32]
FLASH
1M x 16
P0_IN
STATUS BUS
FROM
STATION MODULES
SERIAL DATA
TO EXCITER
MA[0:14]
CS0
CS1
50 MHZ
CLOCK
SINGLE END
TO DIFFERENTIAL
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
CIRCUITRY
HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS
MA[2:21]
MA[2:21]
I/Q DATA
48 MHZ
DSP SPI
DSP_D[31:24]
HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS
TRANSMIT
CLOCK AND
FRAME SYNCH
CIRCUITRY
MD[0:15]
FLASH
1M x 16
MD[16:31]
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY
FLASH
1M x 16
FLASH
1M x 16
P0_IN
BUFFER
MD[0:15]
EEPROM
32k x 8
P0_OUT
LATCH
MD[24:31]
MD[16,17,20-24,28-31]
MD[16:31]
P1_OUT
LATCH
SPI
BUS
32
MD[24:31]
EXPANDED STATUS INPUT
AND OUTPUT CONTROL CIRCUITRY
40
EXCITER
SPI
CONTROL
SPI BUS
TO EXCITER
P0_OUT/P1_OUT
CONTROL BUS
TO
STATION MODULES
Figure:2-11 QUAD CHANNEL Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2)
2--30
68P 81095E 02-D
12/ 4/ 2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
3 Exciter
Overview
This section provides technical information for the Exciter (EX). Table 3-1
describes covered topics.
Table 3-1
Chapter Topics
Chapter
Page
Description
800 MHz Exciter Ð TLN3337;
900 MHz Exciter Ð CLN1357;
1500 MHz Exciter Ð TLN3428
3-2
Describes the functions and characteristics of the Exciter
module for the single channel Base Radio (BR).
QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter
3-7
Describes the functions and characteristics of the Exciter
module for the QUAD channel Base Radio (BR).
Exciter 800 MHz Functional
3-11
Functional Block Diagram for the Single Channel Base Radio
Exciter
800 MHz QUAD ChannelFunctional Block Diagram
3-13
Functional Block Diagram for the QUAD Channel Base
Radio Exciter
FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Reference
Exciter Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) are available for the iDEN EBTS. The FRU
contains the Exciter kit and required packaging. Table 3-2 provides a cross
reference between Exciter FRU numbers and kit numbers.
Table 3-2
FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Referece
Description
FRU Number
Kit Number
Single Channel Exciter (800 MHz)
TLN3337
CLF1490
Single Channel Exciter (900 MHz)
CLN1357
CLF1500
Single Channel Exciter (1500 MHz)
TLN3428
CTX1120
QUAD Channel Exciter/Base Radio Controller
(800 MHz)
CLN1497
CLF1560
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
3-1
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337; 900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357; 1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428
800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337;
900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357;
1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428
Exciter Overview
The Exciter, together with the Power AmpliÞer (PA), provides the transmitter
functions for the Base Radio. The Exciter module consists of a printed circuit
board, a slide-in housing, and associated hardware.
The Exciter connects to the Base Radio backplane through a 96-pin DIN connector
and two blindmate RF connectors. Two Torx screws on the front of the Exciter
hold it in the chassis.
The Exciter has no controls or indicators. The manualÕs Base Radio section
supplies transmitter circuitry speciÞcations, including Exciter and PA
speciÞcations.
Figures 3-1 and 3-2 show the Exciter with the cover removed.
Figure:3-1
3-2
800/900 MHz Exciter (with cover removed)
68P81095E02- D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337; 900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357; 1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428
Figure:3-2
1500 MHz Exciter, version TLN3428 (with top removed)
1.5GHZ-B859
Theory of Operation
Table 3-3 lists and describes basic Exciter circuitry. Figures 3-4 and 3-5 show the
functional block diagram of the Single Carrier Exciter. Figures 3-6 show the
functional block diagram of the QUAD Carrier Exciter.
Address Decoder Circuitry
The address decoder circuitry enables the BRC to use the address bus to control
Exciter circuitry. The BRC can select a speciÞc device on the Exciter via the SPI
bus for control or data communication purposes.
If board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 through A5 as the Exciter
address, the BRC enables the chip select circuitry. The chip select circuitry then
decodes address lines A0 and A1 to generate the chip select signals for the
EEPROM, A/D converter, Tranlin IC, and PLL IC. Once selected, the BRC uses
the SPI bus to send and receive data to and from the device.
Memory Circuitry
The memory circuitry consists of an EEPROM located on the Exciter. The BRC
performs all memory read and write operations via the SPI bus. Information
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
3-3
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337; 900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357; 1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428
Table 3-3
Exciter Circuitry
Circuit
Tranlin IC
Description
Performs the following functions:
¥ up-converts the baseband data to the Þrst IF
¥ down-converts the IF feedback signal to baseband
¥ uses a baseband Cartesian feedback loop system, which is
necessary to obtain linearity from the transmitter and
avoid splattering power into adjacent channels
¥ performs training functions for proper linearization of the
transmitter
Exciter IC
Interfaces with Tranlin IC to perform:
¥ up-conversion from the Þrst IF to the transmit operating
frequency
¥ down-conversion to the IF of PA output feedback signal
for input to the Tranlin IC
Address Decode, Memory, &
A/D Converter
Serves as the main interface between the synthesizer, Tranlin
IC, A/D, and EEPROM on the Exciter and the BRC via the
SPI bus
Frequency Synthesizer
Circuitry
Consists of a phase-locked loop and VCO. Provides a LO
signal to the Exciter IC for the second up-conversion and for
the Þrst down-conversion of the feedback signal from the PA
970 MHz VCO (800 MHz BR)
Provides a LO signal to the Exciter IC for the second
up-conversion to the transmit frequency
1025 MHz VCO (900 MHz BR)
760 MHz VCO (1500 MHz BR)
237 MHz VCO (800 MHz BR)
236 MHz VCO (1500 MHz BR)
Provides a LO signal to Tranlin IC for the Þrst up-conversion
and for the second down-conversion of the feedback signal.
The synthesizer and divide by 2 circuitry within the Tranlin
IC set the Þrst IF to 118.5 MHz
180.6 MHz VCO (900 MHz BR)
Provides a LO signal to Tranlin IC for the Þrst up-conversion
and for the second down-conversion of the feedback signal.
The synthesizer and divide by 2 circuitry within the Tranlin
IC set the Þrst IF to 90.3 MHz
Regulator Circuitry
Provides a regulated voltage to various ICs and RF devices
located on the Exciter
Linear RF ampliÞer Stages
AmpliÞes the RF signal from the Exciter IC to an appropriate
level for input to the PA
Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
provides automatic gain control of the transmitter (Exciter and
Power AmpliÞer modules) to maintain a level forward gain of
the RF ampliÞer stages.
stored in this memory device includes the kit number, revision number, module
speciÞc scaling and correction factors, and free form information (scratch pad).
A/D Converter Circuitry
Analog signals from various areas throughout the Exciter board are fed to the
A/D converter. Upon the BRCÕs request, these analog signals are converted to a
digital signal and are output to the BRC via the SPI lines. The BRC periodically
monitors and controls all signals.
3-4
68P81095E02- D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337; 900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357; 1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428
The BRC monitors the regulated voltages, the external wattmeter (optional), the
PLL circuit, and other internal signals.
Tranlin IC Circuitry
The Tranlin IC is a main interface between the Exciter and BRC. The Digital Signal
Processors (DSP) of the BRC send Digitized signals (baseband data) to the Exciter
via the DSP data bus. The DSP clock signal from the Receiver clocks these data
signals.
The differential data clock signal also serves as a 4.8 MHz reference signal to the
internal synthesizer circuit of the Tranlin IC. The Tranlin compares the reference
signal with the output of the 237 MHz or 180.6 MHz (900 MHz BR) or 236 MHz
(1500 MHz BR) Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO). If the VCO output is out of
phase or differs in frequency, correction pulses arrive at the Oscillator and adjust
the VCO output.
The Tranlin IC up-converts the baseband data received from the BRC to the Þrst IF
of 118.5 MHz (90.3 MHz for 900 MHz BR). It also down-converts an IF feedback
signal from the Exciter IC to baseband data for summing.
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus is used to communicate with the Tranlin
IC. The SPI bus serves as a general purpose bi-directional serial link between the
BRC and other modules of the Base Radio, including the Exciter. The SPI bus is
used to send control and operational data signals to and from the various circuits
of the Exciter.
Exciter IC Circuitry
The Exciter IC interfaces directly with the Tranlin IC to perform up-conversion
from the Þrst IF to the programmed transmit operating frequency. The Þrst IF
signal is passed through a band-pass Þlter before it reaches the Exciter IC.
The Exciter IC also down-converts the RF feedback signal from the PA to its IF
signal. The IF signal is then input to the Tranlin IC for conversion to baseband
data, which computes the Cartesian feedback.
Synthesizer Circuitry
The synthesizer circuitry consists of the Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) IC and
associated circuitry. The output of this circuit is combined with the 970 MHz
VCO (1025 MHz for 900 MHz BR, 700 MHz for 1500 MHz BR) to supply a Local
Oscillator (LO) signal to the Exciter IC for the second up-conversion of the
programmed transmit frequency. This signal is also used for the Þrst
down-conversion of the feedback signal from the PA.
An internal phase detector generates a logic pulse in proportion to the difference
in phase or frequency between the reference frequency and loop pulse signal.
If the reference frequency is faster than the VCO feedback frequency, the PLL IC
outputs an up signal. If the reference frequency is slower than the VCO feedback
frequency, the PLL IC outputs a down signal. These pulses are used as correction
signals and are fed to a charge pump circuit.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
3-5
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz Exciter – TLN3337; 900 MHz Exciter – CLN1357; 1500 MHz Exciter – TLN3428
The charge pump circuit consists of Þve transistors and its associated biasing
components. This circuit generates the correction signal and causes it to move up
or down in response to the phase detector output pulses. The correction signal
passes through the low-pass loop Þlter to the 970 MHz Voltage Controlled
Oscillator (VCO) circuit (1025 MHz VCO for 900 MHz BR).
970/1025 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO)
The 970 MHz VCO (1025 MHz for 900 MHz BR, 700 MHz for 1500 MHz BR)
generates the second injection frequency for the Exciter IC.
The VCO requires a very low-noise DC supply voltage of +10 Vdc for proper
operation. A Super Filter, which contains an ultra low-pass Þlter, drives the
oscillator. The Super Filter obtains the required low-noise output voltage for the
oscillator.
The output of the oscillator is tapped and sent to the VCO Feedback Filter. This
feedback signal is supplied to the Synthesizer circuitry for the generation of
correction pulses.
The untapped output of the 970 (or 1025) MHz VCO is sent to the second LO
injection circuitry.
236/237/180.6 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO)
The 237 MHz VCO (180.6 MHz for 900 MHz BR, 236 MHz for 1500 MHz BR)
provides a LO signal to Tranlin IC for the Þrst up-conversion and for the second
down-conversion of the feedback signal. The synthesizer and divide by 2
circuitry within the Tranlin IC set the Þrst IF to 118.5 MHz (90.3 MHz for 900 MHz
BR).
Regulator Circuity
This circuit generates three regulated voltages of +5 Vdc, +10 Vdc, and +11.8 Vdc.
All voltages are obtained from the +14.2 Vdc backplane voltage. These voltages
provide power to various ICs and RF devices of the Exciter.
Linear RF Amplifier Stages
This circuitry is used to amplify the RF signal from the Exciter IC to an
appropriate level for input to the PA.
Automatic Gain Control (AGC) (1500 MHz only)
The Automatic Gain Control (AGC) circuit controls the output gain of the
transmitter (Exciter and Power AmpliÞer modules) so that constant forward gain
of the RF ampliÞer stages is maintained. This is accomplished through the
comparison of feedback signals from the Power AmpliÞer and the Þrst ampliÞer
stage of the Exciter.
The output of the differential ampliÞers is used to adjust the Attenuator and
Image Filter.
3-6
68P81095E02- D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter
QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter
Exciter Overview
The Exciter and the Power AmpliÞer (PA) provide the transmitter functions of the
QUAD Channel Base Radio. The Exciter module consists of a printed circuit
board, a slide in housing, and associated hardware. The BRC shares the printed
circuit board and housing.
The Exciter connects to the Base Radio backplane through a 168-pin connector
and two blindmate RF connectors. Controller and exciter circuitry also
interconnect on the Exciter/Controller module. Two Torx screws on the front of
the Exciter secure it to the chassis.
An LED identiÞes the ExciterÕs operational condition, as described in the
manualÕs Controller section. The Base Radio section of the manual provides
speciÞcations for transmitter circuitry. This information includes data on the
Exciter and PAs.
Figures 3-3 shows the Exciter with the cover removed.
Figure:3-3
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
800 MHz QUAD Channel Exciter (with cover removed)M
11/9/2000
3-7
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter
Theory of Operation
Table 3-4 describes the basic circuitry of the Exciter. Figures 3-4 and 3-5 show the
functional block diagram of the Single Carrier Exciter. Figures 3-6 show the
QUAD Carrier ExciterÕs functional block diagram.
Table 3-4 Exciter Circuitry
Circuit
LNODCT IC
Description
¥ Up-converts baseband data to the transmit frequency
¥ Down-converts the PA feedback signal to baseband
¥ Uses a baseband Cartesian feedback loop system, necessary
to obtain linearity from the transmitter and avoid
splattering power into adjacent channels
¥ Performs training functions for proper linearization of the
transmitter
Memory & A/D Converter
Serves as the main interface between the synthesizer, Tranlin
IC, A/D, and EEPROM on the Exciter, and the BRC via the
SPI bus
Frequency Synthesizer
Circuitry
¥ Consists of a phase-locked loop and VCO
970 MHz VCO (800 MHz BR)
Provides a LO signal to the LNODCT IC, for up-conversion
to the transmit frequency
90.3 MHz VCO (800 MHz BR)
Provides a LO signal to LNODCT IC, for the up-conversion
and for the down-conversion of the feedback signal.
¥ The LNODCT IC mixes the 970 MHz VCO and 90.3 MHz
VCO
¥ Provides a LO signal to the LNODCT IC for the second
up-conversion and first down-conversion of the feedback
signal from the PA
¥ The mixed output becomes the LO signal for Transmit
signal up- and down-conversion
Regulator Circuitry
Provides a regulated voltage to various ICs and RF devices
located on the Exciter
Linear RF ampliÞer Stages
AmpliÞes the RF signal from the Exciter IC to an appropriate
level for input to the PA
Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
¥ Provides automatic gain control of the transmitter (Exciter
and Power AmpliÞer modules)
¥ Maintains a level forward gain of the RF ampliÞer stages
Memory Circuitry
The memory circuitry is an EEPROM on the Controller portion of the Exciter/
Controller module. The Controller performs memory read and write operations
over the SPI bus. The memory device stores the following data...
3-8
❐
kit number
❐
revision number
❐
module speciÞc scaling and correction factors
❐
serial number
68P81095E02- D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter
❐
free form information (scratch pad)
A/D Converter Circuitry
Analog signals from various areas throughout the Exciter board enter the
A/D converter (A/DC). The A/DC converts these analog signals to digital form.
Upon request of the BRC, A/DC output signals enter the BRC via SPI lines. The
Controller periodically monitors all signals.
Some of the monitored signals include ampliÞer bias and synthesizer signals.
LNODCT IC Circuitry
The LNODCT IC is a main interface between the Exciter and BRC. The BRCÕs
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) sends digitized signals (baseband data) to the
Exciter over the DSP data bus.
The differential data clock signal serves as a 4.8 MHz reference signal to the
LNODCT ICÕs internal synthesizer. The LNODCT compares the reference signal
with the outputs of Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCOs). The LNODCT might
sense that a VCOÕs output is out of phase or off-frequency. If so, then the
LNODCT sends correction pulses to the VCO. The pulses adjust VCO output,
thereby matching phase and frequency with the reference.
The LNODCT IC up-converts baseband data from the BRC to the transmit
frequency. The LNODCT IC also down-converts the Transmit signal from the
Power AmpliÞer to baseband data for summing.
The BRC uses the Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus to communicate with the
LNODCT IC. The SPI bus serves as a general purpose, bi-directional, serial link
between the BRC and other Base Radio modules, including the Exciter. The SPI
carries control and operational data signals to and from Exciter circuits.
Synthesizer Circuitry
The synthesizer circuit consists of the Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) IC and associated
circuitry. This circuitÕs output combines with the 970 MHz VCO signal. The result
is a Local Oscillator (LO) signal for the LNODCT IC. The LNODCT uses this LO
signal to up-convert the programmed transmit frequency. The LNODCT also
uses the LO signal to down-convert the PA feedback signal.
An internal phase detector generates a logic pulse. This pulse is proportional to
the phase or frequency difference between the reference frequency and loop pulse
signal.
If the reference frequency is faster than the VCO feedback frequency, the PLL IC
outputs an up signal. If the reference frequency is slower than the VCO feedback
frequency, the PLL IC outputs a down signal. The synthesizer uses these pulses as
correction signals and feed them to a charge pump circuit.
The charge pump circuit consists of Þve transistors and associated biasing
components. This circuit generates the correction signal. The correction signal
moves up or down in response to phase detector output pulses. The correction
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
3-9
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel 800 MHz Exciter
signal passes through the low-pass loop Þlter. The signal then enters the 970 MHz
Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) circuit.
970 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO)
The 970 MHz VCO generates the second injection frequency for the LNODCT IC.
For proper operation, the VCO requires a very low-noise, DC supply voltage. An
ultra low-pass Þlter prepares the necessary low-noise voltage and drives the
oscillator.
The tapped oscillator output signal enters the VCO Feedback Filter. The
Synthesizer circuitry uses this feedback signal in the generation of correction
pulses.
The untapped output signal of the 970 MHz VCO enters the second LO
injection circuit.
90.3 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO)
The synthesizer within the LNODCT IC sets the 90.3 MHz signal. The 90.3 MHz
VCO provides a LO signal to the LNODCT IC. The LNODCT uses this signal in
up-converting and down-converting the feedback signal.
Regulator Circuitry
The voltage regulator generates three regulated voltages: +3 Vdc, +5 Vdc and
+11.7 Vdc. The regulator obtains input voltages from the +3.3 Vdc and +14.2 Vdc
backplane voltages. The regulated voltages power various ICs and RF devices in
the Exciter.
Linear RF Amplifier Stages
The Linear RF AmpliÞer boosts the RF signal from the LNODCT IC. The RF
AmpliÞer outputs an appropriate signal level to drive the PA.
3-10
68P81095E02- D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Exciter
Exciter
800 MHz Functional
Block Diagram
970 MHZ
(1025 MHZ)
VCO CIRCUITRY
EXCITER IC CIRCUITRY
TRANLIN IC CIRCUITRY
RF FEEDBACK
FROM PA MODULE
+10 V
SUPER
FILTER
DIFFERENTIAL
TISIC DATA & CLOCK
IFOUT
DATA & CLOCK
FROM
BRC MODULE
BPF
TRANLIN IC
EXCITER IC
IFIN
237 MHZ
(180.6 MHZ)
VCO
CIRCUITRY
CONTROL VOLTAGE
(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)
2ND LO
INJECTION
CIRCUITRY
1ST LO
INJECTION
CIRCUITRY
OSCILLATOR
BUFFER
AMP
VCO FEEDBACK
OSCILLATOR
BUFFER
AMP
SYNTHESIZER
CIRCUITRY
REGULATOR
CIRCUITRY
ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/D
CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
CHIP
SELECT
+14.2 V
FROM
BACKPLANE
CHIP SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
CHIP
SELECT
SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)
FROM BACKPLANE
+10 V
REGULATOR
(U3702)
MEMORY
+10 V
SOURCE
2.1 MHZ
BUFFER
ADDRESS BUS
FROM CONTROL
MODULE
CHARGE
PUMP
LOW-PASS
LOOP
FILTER
+11.8 V
SOURCE
+11.8 V
REGULATOR
BOARD SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
PHASE
LOCKED
LOOP
RIN
IC
FIN
VARIOUS
SIGNALS
TO MONITOR
A/D
CONVERTER
+5 V
REGULATOR
VCO
FEEDBACK
FILTER
ANALOG
+5 V SOURCE
SPI BUS
TO/FROM CONTROL
MODULE
LINEAR RF AMPLIFIER
CIRCUITRY
RF OUTPUT
TO PA MODULE
BPF
EBTS283
101597JNM
NOTE: Where two frequencies are given, frequency without parentheses applies to 800 MHz BR only and frequency with parentheses applies to 900 MHz BR only.
Figure:3-4
6 8 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
4/1/2000
Exciter Functional Block Diagram
3-11
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Exciter
Exciter
Functional Block Diagram
Model TLN3428
RF FEEDBACK
FROM PA MODULE
TRANLIN IC
CIRCUITRY
RESET
RESET FROM
BRC MODULE
DSP DATA AND CLOCK
POWER
CONTROL
BAND-PASS
FILTER
IFOUT
DSP DATA & CLOCK
TRANLIN IC
(U3600)
FROM BRC MODULE
SPI BUS (DATA & CLOCK)
EXCITER IC
CIRCUITRY
IFIN
SPI BUS
TO/FROM
BRC MODULE
RF FEEDBACK
FOR AGC DIFF AMP
700 MHZ
VCO CIRCUITRY
EXCITER IC
(U3500)
+10 V
SUPER
FILTER
(Q3300)
+10 V
SUPER
FILTER
(Q3200)
1ST LO
INJECTION
CIRCUITRY
(L3201, C3206)
FREQUENCY
DOUBLER
(U4100, T4100,
CR4100)
CONTROL VOLTAGE
(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)
OSCILLATOR
(Q3301)
VCO FEEDBACK
CONTROL VOLTAGE
(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)
236 MHZ VCO
CIRCUITRY
2ND LO
INJECTION
CIRCUITRY
(C4104, R3513)
REGULATOR
CIRCUITRY
+14.2 V
FROM
BACKPLANE
+10 V
REGULATOR
(U3702)
OSCILLATOR
(Q3201)
+10 V
SOURCE
SYNTHESIZER
CIRCUITRY
+11.8 V
REGULATOR
(U3701)
+11.8 V
SOURCE
CHIP SELECT
+5 V
REGULATOR
(U3703)
ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/D
CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
LO-PASS
LOOP
FILTER
(U3401)
ANALOG
+5 V SOURCE
REFERENCE
BUFFER
(Q3401)
PHASE
LOCKED
LOOP IC
(U3400)
RIN
CHARGE
PUMP
(Q3404, Q3405,
Q3406, Q3407,
Q3408)
CHIP SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
(U3000)
ADDRESS BUS
FROM BRC
2.1 MHZ
CHIP SELECT
CHIP SELECT
CHIP SELECT
MEMORY
(U3006)
VCO
FEEDBACK
FILTER
(U3400)
AGC CIRCUITRY
CHIP SELECT
BOARD SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
(U3000)
VARIOUS
SIGNALS
TO MONITOR
SPI BUS
TO/FROM BRC
DIFF AMP
(U3801,
U3802)
A/D
CONVERTER
(U3100)
OPEN LOOP
ALARM
TO A/D
SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)
FROM BACKPLANE
FIN
EXTERNAL
2.1 MHZ
REFERENCE
INTEGRATION/ATTN DRIVER
LINEAR RF AMPLIFIER
CIRCUITRY
RF FEEDBACK
FOR AGC
DIFF AMP
ATTENUATOR
IMAGE FILTER
(FL4000, FL4001
CR4000, CR4002)
RF OUTPUT
TO PA MODULE
AMP 4
(Q4002, Q4003)
Figure:3-5
3-12
AMP 3
(Q4200, Q4201)
AMP 2
(Q3902, Q3903)
AMP 1
(Q3900, Q3901)
Exciter Functional Block Diagram
68P 81095E 02-D
4/ 1/ 2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Exciter
Exciter
800 MHz QUAD ChannelFunctional Block
970 MHZ
(1025 MHZ)
VCO CIRCUITRY
EXCITER IC CIRCUITRY
TRANLIN IC CIRCUITRY
RF FEEDBACK
FROM PA MODULE
+10 V
SUPER
FILTER
DIFFERENTIAL
TISIC DATA & CLOCK
IFOUT
DATA & CLOCK
FROM
BRC MODULE
BPF
TRANLIN IC
EXCITER IC
IFIN
237 MHZ
(180.6 MHZ)
VCO
CIRCUITRY
CONTROL VOLTAGE
(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)
2ND LO
INJECTION
CIRCUITRY
1ST LO
INJECTION
CIRCUITRY
OSCILLATOR
BUFFER
AMP
CH
BE PS
T -U
MU ARK
U EE
SYNTHESIZER
CIRCUITRY
REGULATOR
CIRCUITRY
ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/D
CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
OSCILLATOR
BUFFER
AMP
CHIP
SELECT
+14.2 V
FROM
BACKPLANE
CHIP SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
CHIP
SELECT
+10 V
REGULATOR
(U3702)
MEMORY
+10 V
SOURCE
VARIOUS
SIGNALS
TO MONITOR
A/D
CONVERTER
+5 V
REGULATOR
SPI BUS
TO/FROM CONTROL
MODULE
TH
PHASE
LOCKED
LOOP
RIN
IC
CHARGE
PUMP
LOW-PASS
LOOP
FILTER
+11.8 V
SOURCE
+11.8 V
REGULATOR
BOARD SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)
FROM BACKPLANE
2.1 MHZ
BUFFER
ADDRESS BUS
FROM CONTROL
MODULE
VCO FEEDBACK
ANALOG
+5 V SOURCE
FIN
VCO
FEEDBACK
FILTER
LINEAR RF AMPLIFIER
CIRCUITRY
RF OUTPUT
TO PA MODULE
BPF
EBTS283
101597JNM
NOTE: Where two frequencies are given, frequency without parentheses applies to 800 MHz BR only and frequency with parentheses applies to 900 MHz BR only.
Figure:3-6
6 8 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
11/10/2000
Exciter Functional Block Diagram
3-13
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Exciter
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
68 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
11/10/2000
3-14
y
4 Power Amplifier
Overview
This section provides technical information for the Power AmpliÞer (PA). Table
4-1 describes covered topics.
Table 4-1
Chapter Topics
Chapter
Page
Description
40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580);
70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040);
60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300);
40W, 1500 MHz Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426);
800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)
4-2
Describes the functions and characteristics of the Base Radio
Power AmpliÞer (PA) module for the single and QUAD
Channel Base Radio (BR).
40W, 800 MHz Power AmpliÞer Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580)
4-15
Functional Block Diagram for the 40 Watt, 800 MHz, Single
Channel Base Radio Power AmpliÞer (PA)
70W, 800 MHz Power AmpliÞer Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040)
4-16
Functional Block Diagram for the 70 Watt, 800 MHz, Single
Channel Base Radio Power AmpliÞer (PA)
60W, 900 MHz Power AmpliÞer Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300)
4-17
Functional Block Diagram for the 60 Watt, 900 MHz, Single
Channel Base Radio Power AmpliÞer (PA)
40W, 1500 MHz Power AmpliÞer Ð TLN3426
4-18
Functional Block Diagram for the 40 Watt, 1500 MHz, Single
Channel Base Radio Power AmpliÞer (PA)
800 MHz QUAD Carrier Power AmpliÞer
4-19
Functional Block Diagram for the 800 MHz QUAD Channel
Base Radio Power AmpliÞer (PA)
FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Reference
Power Amplifer (PA) Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) are available for the iDEN
EBTS. The FRU contains the PAkit and required packaging. Table 4-2 provides a
cross reference between PA FRU numbers and kit numbers.
Table 4-2
FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Referece
FRU Number
Kit Number
40 W, 800 MHz Single Channel Base Radio PA
TLF2020
CLF1772
70 W, 800 MHz Single Channel Base Radio PA
TLN3335
CLF1771
60 W, 900 MHz Single Channel Base Radio PA
CLN1355
CLN7125
40 W, 1500 MHz Single Channel Base Radio PA
TLN3426
TTG1000
800 MHz QUAD Channel Base Radio PA
CLF1499
CLF1400
Description
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 9 E10 D
11/9/2000
4-1
y
40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580); 70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040); 60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300); 40W, 1500 MHz
Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426); 800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)
40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580);
70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040);
60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300);
40W, 1500 MHz Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426);
800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)
PA Overview
The Power Amplifier (PA), together with the Exciter, provides transmitter functions for
the QUAD Channel Base Radio. The PA accepts the low-level modulated RF signal from
the Exciter and amplifies the signal for transmission via the RF output connector.
The 800 MHz Base Radio can be equipped with either 40 Watt PA, TLF2020 (version
TTF1580) or 70 Watt PA, TLN3335 (version CTF1040). The 40W PA module consists of
five hybrid modules, four pc boards, and a module heatsink/housing assembly. The 70W
PA module consists of eight hybrid modules, four pc boards, and a module heatsink/
housing assembly.
The 900 MHz Base Radio is equipped with 60 Watt PA, CLN1355 (kit no. CLF1300A).
The PA module consists of four hybrid modules, two pc boards, and a module heatsink/
housing assembly.
The 1500 MHz Base Radio is equipped with 40 Watt PA, TLN3426. The PA module
consists of four hybrid modules, two pc boards, and the module heatsink/housing
assembly.
The 800MHz Quad Base Radio is equipped with the Quad PA, CLF1400. The PA module
consists of six hybrid modules, two pc boards, and the module heatsink/housing assembly.
The PA connects to the chassis backplane using a 96-pin DIN connector and three
blindmate RF connectors. Two Torx screws located on the front of the PA hold it in the
chassis.
Specifications of the transmitter circuitry, including the Exciter and PAs, are provided in
Base Radio Overview section. Figure 4-1 shows the 70W, 800 MHz PA. Figure 4-2 shows
the 60W, 900 MHz PA. Figure 4-3 shows the 40W, 1500 MHz PA.
4-2
68P81099E10 D 11/9/200 0
y
40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580); 70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040); 60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300); 40W, 1500 MHz
Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426); 800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)
NOTE: 70W PA shown. 40W PA is similar.
Figure:4-1
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 9 E10 D
11/9/2000
70W, 800 MHz PA Ð TLN3335 (with cover removed)
4-3
y
40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580); 70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040); 60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300); 40W, 1500 MHz
Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426); 800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)
Figure:4-2
4-4
60W, 900 MHz PA Ð CLN1355 (with cover removed)
68P81099E10 D 11/9/200 0
y
40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580); 70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040); 60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300); 40W, 1500 MHz
Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426); 800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)
1.5GHZ-Z858
Figure:4-3
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 9 E10 D
11/9/2000
40W, 1500 PA (with cover removed)
4-5
y
40W, 800 MHz Ð TLF2020 (TTF1580); 70W, 800 MHz Ð TLN3335 (CTF1040); 60W, 900 MHz Ð CLN1355 (CLF1300); 40W, 1500 MHz
Ð TLN3426 (TLN3426); 800 MHz QUAD Ð CLF1400 (CLF1400)
Figure:4-4
4-6
QUAD Channel PA (with cover removed)
68P81099E10 D 11/9/200 0
y
Theory of Operation
Theory of Operation
Table 4-3 describes the basic functions of the PA circuitry. Figures 4-5, 4-6 and 4-9 show
the functional block diagrams of 40W, 800 MHz PA; 70W, 800 MHz PA and the 800MHz,
Quad PA, respectively. Figures 4-7 shows the functional block diagram of the 60W, 900
MHz PA. Figures 4-8 shows a functional block diagram of the 40W, 1500 MHz PA.
Table 4-3
Power Amplifier Circuitry
Circuit
DC/Metering Board
Description
¥ Serves as the main interface between the PA and the backplane board
¥ Accepts RF input from the Exciter via a blindmate RF connector
¥ Routes the RF input via a 50 ½ stripline to the Linear Driver Module RF
amplifier
¥ Routes the RF feedback from the RF Combiner/Peripheral Module to the
Exciter via a blindmate RF connector
¥ Provides digital alarm and metering information of the PA to the BRC via
the SPI bus
¥ Routes DC power to the fans and PA
Linear Driver Module (LDM)
¥ Contains one Class AB stage which, in turn, drives a parallel Class AB stage
¥ Amplifies the low-level RF signal ~25 mW average power from the Exciter
via the DC/Metering Board (800MHz and 900MHz)
¥ Amplifies the low-level RF signal ~8 mW average power from the Exciter
via the DC/Metering Board (1500MHz)
¥ Provides an output of:
~10 W (800MHz) average power
~8 W (800MHz Quad) average power
~17 W (900MHz) average power
~16 W (1500MHz) average power
Interconnect Board
(800 MHz only)
¥ Provides RF interconnection from the LDM to the RF Splitter board
RF Splitter/DC board
¥ Interfaces with the DC/Metering Board to route DC power to the LFMs
¥ Provides DC supply filtering
¥ Contains splitter circuits that split the RF output signal of the LDM to the
three Linear Final Modules (40W, 800MHz)
¥ Contains splitter circuits that split the RF output signal of the LDM to the
six Linear Final Modules (70W, 800MHz and 800MHz Quad)
¥ Contains a Quadrature splitter circuit to split the RF output signal of the
LDM to the two Linear Final Modules (900 MHz and 1500 MHz)
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 9 E10 D
11/9/2000
4-7
y
Theory of Operation
Power Amplifier Circuitry (Continued)
Table 4-3
Circuit
Linear Final Module
(LFM)
Description
¥ Each module contains two Class AB amplifiers in parallel. Each module
amplifies one of three RF signals (~ 8 W average power) from the LDM
(via the Splitter/DC board). Three LFMs provide a sum RF output of
approximately 48 W average power. (40W, 800MHz)
¥ Each module contains two Class AB amplifiers in parallel. Each module
amplifies one of six RF signals (~ 8 W average power) from the LDM (via
the Splitter/DC board). Six LFMs provide a sum RF output of
approximately 97 W average power. (70W, 800MHz)
¥ Each module contains two Class AB amplifiers in parallel. Each module
amplifies one of six RF signals from the LDM (via the Splitter/DC board).
Six LFMs sum to provide the final RF power. (800MHz Quad)
¥ Each module contains two Class AB amplifiers in parallel. Each module
amplifies one of two RF signals (~ 17 W average power) from the LDM
(via the Splitter/DC board). Two LFMs provide a sum RF output of
approximately 75 W average power. (900MHz)
¥ Each module contains two Class AB amplifiers in parallel. Each module
amplifies one of two RF signals (~ 16 W average power) from the LDM
(via the Splitter/DC board). Two LFMs provide a sum RF output of
approximately 28 W average power. (1500MHz)
RF Interconnect Board
(40W, 800 MHz PA only)
¥ Contains three transmission lines that interconnect the LFMs to the RF
Combiner/Peripheral Module
Combiner Board
(70W, 800 MHz PA and
800MHz Quad only)
¥ Contains three separate Quadrature combiner circuits that respectively
combine the six RF outputs from the LFMs into three signals. These three
signals, in turn, are applied to the RF Combiner/Peripheral Module.
RF Combiner/Peripheral
Module
¥ Contains a combiner circuit that combines the three RF signals from the RF
Interconnect Board (40W PA) or the Combiner Board (70W PA and Quad
PA). It routes the combined RF signal through a circulator and a Low Pass
Filter. The final output signal is routed to the blindmate RF connector (800
MHz)
¥ Contains a Quadrature combiner circuit to combine the RF signal from the
two LFMs. It routes the combined RF signal through a circulator and a Low
Pass Filter. The output signal is routed to the blindmate RF connector (900
MHz and 1500 MHz)
¥ Contains an RF coupler that provides an RF feedback signal to the Exciter
via a blindmate RF connector. Also contains a forward and reverse power
detector for alarm and power monitoring purposes
Fan Assembly
¥ Consists of three fans used to keep the PA within predetermined operating
temperatures
DC/Metering Board(Non-Quad)
The DC/Metering Board provides the interface between the PA and the Base Radio
backplane. The preamplified/modulated RF signal is input directly from the Exciter via
the Base Radio backplane.
The RF input signal is applied to the input of the Linear Driver Module (LDM). The RF
feedback signal is fed back to the Exciter, where it is monitored for errors.
The primary function of the DC/Metering Boards is to monitor proper operation of the PA.
This information is forwarded to the Base Radio Controller (BRC) via the SPI bus. The
alarms diagnostic points monitored by the BRC on the PA include the following:
¥
4-8
Forward power
68P81099E10 D 11/9/200 0
y
Theory of Operation
¥
Reflected power
¥
PA temperature sense
DC/Metering Board (Quad only)
The DC/Metering Board in the Quad Radio serves the same function as does other radios.
However, its circuitry is modified to be compatible with the Quad Station. As such, the
logic circuitry is 3.3V.
In addition to the functions listed in the non-Quad version, the following metering points
are ported to the SPI bus:
¥
A and B Currents
¥
Fan Sensor
Linear Driver Module
800 MHz
The Linear Driver Module (LDM) amplifies the low-level RF signal from the Exciter.
The LDM consists of a two-stage cascaded amplifier.
The RF input signal applied to the LDM has an average power level of approximately 25
mW. The LDM amplifies this signal to an average output level of approximately 10 Watts.
(8W in Quad) The LDM output is fed to the RF Splitter/DC Distribution Board via an
Interconnect Board.
900 MHz
The Linear Driver Module (LDM) amplifies the low-level RF signal from the Exciter.
The LDM consists of a three-stage cascaded amplifier. This output is fed directly to the
RF Splitter/DC Distribution Board.
The RF input signal applied to the LDM has an average power level of approximately 25
mW. The LDM amplifies this signal to an average output level of approximately 17 Watts.
1500 MHz
The Linear Driver Module (LDM) takes the low level RF signal and amplifies it. The
LDM consists of a four stage cascaded amplifier. The RF input signal has an average
power level of 8 mW. The LDM amplifies the input signal to an average output level of
approximately 16 Watts. This output is fed directly to the RF Splitter/DC Distribution
Board.
The current drain of the Power Amplifiers is monitored by the A/D converter on the DC/
Metering board. A voltage signal representative of the LDM current drain is sent to the
BRC. A Power Amplifier alarm is generated if the signal is outside of either the upper or
lower limits.
68 P 8 1 0 9 9 E10 D
11/9/2000
4-9
y
Theory of Operation
Interconnect Board (800 MHz and 800MHz Quad only)
The output of the LDM is applied to the Interconnect Board, which provides an RF
connection to the RF Splitter/DC Distribution Board. As a separate function, area on the
Interconnect Board serves as a convenient mounting location for electrolytic capacitors
used for filtering the +28 VDC supply.
RF Splitter/DC Distribution Board
800 MHz
The RF Splitter portion of this board accepts the amplified signal from the LDM (via the
Interconnect Board). The primary function of this circuit is to split the RF signal into
drive signals for the LFMs.
In the 40W PA, this circuit splits the drive signal into three separate paths to be applied to
the three LFMs, where the signals will be amplified further. In the 70W PA and Quad PA,
this circuit splits the drive signal into six separate paths to be applied to the six LFMs,
where the signals will be amplified further.
The DC Distribution portion of this board interfaces directly with the DC/Metering Board
to route DC power to the LFMs.
900 MHz and 1500 MHz
The RF Splitter portion of this board accepts the amplified signal from the LDM. The
primary function of this circuit is to split the RF signal into two separate paths. These two
outputs are fed directly to two separate Linear Final modules where the RF signals will be
amplified further.
The DC Distribution portion of this board interfaces directly with the DC/Metering Board
to route DC power to the LFMs.
Linear Final Modules
800 MHz
The RF Splitter output signals are applied directly into the LFMs for final amplification.
Each LFM contains parallel PAs that amplify the RF signals.
In the 40W PA, the parallel LFMs amplify the input signals to a sum output level of
approximately 48 Watts average power. The amplified signal is then sent directly to the
RF Interconnect Board. In the 70W PA, the parallel LFMs amplify the input signals to a
sum output level of approximately 97 Watts average power. In the Quad PA, the function
is similar to the 70W PA. The amplified signal is then sent directly to the Combiner Board.
900 MHz
The RF signals from the outputs of the RF Splitter are applied directly into the Linear
Final Module (LFM) for final amplification. Each LFM contains dual PAs that amplify
the RF signals to a combined output level of approximately 75 Watts average power. The
amplified signal is then sent directly to the RF Combiner circuit for final distribution.
4-10
68P81099E10 D 11/9/200 0
y
Theory of Operation
1500 MHz
The two RF signals from the outputs of the RF Splitter are input directly into the Linear
Final Module (LFM) for final amplification. Each LFM contains dual power amplifiers
that amplify the RF signals to an output equal to approximately 28 Watts average power.
The amplified signal is then sent directly to the RF Combiner circuit for final distribution.
The current drain of the Power Amplifiers is monitored by the A/D converter on the DC/
Metering board. A voltage signal representative of the LFM current drain is sent to the
BRC. A Power Amplifier alarm is generated if the signal is outside of either the upper or
lower limits.
RF Interconnect Board (40W, 800 MHz PA Only)
The RF Interconnect Board consists of transmission line paths which route the three
output signals from the LFMs to the three inputs of the RF Combiner/Peripheral Module.
Combiner Board (70W, 800 MHz PA and 800MHz Quad
PA Only)
The Combiner Board combines pairs of signals into single signals, thereby combining the
six signals from the LDMs into three signals. The resulting three signals are applied to the
RF Combiner/Peripheral Module.
RF Combiner/Peripheral Module
800 MHz and 800MHz Quad
This module consists of two portions: an RF combiner and a peripheral module. The RF
Combiner portion of the module combines the three RF signals from the RF Interconnect
Board (40W PA) or the Combiner Board (70W PA) into a single signal using a Wilkinson
coupler arrangement.
Following the combiner circuit, the single combined RF signal is then passed through a
directional coupler which derives a signal sample of the LFM RF power output. Via the
coupler, a sample of the RF output signal is fed to the Exciter as a feedback signal.
Following the coupler, the power output signal is passed through a circulator, which
protects the PA in the event of high reflected power.
The peripheral portion of the module provides a power monitor circuit that monitors the
forward and reflected power of the output signal. This circuit furnishes the A/D converter
on the DC/Metering Board with input signals representative of the forward and reflected
power levels.
For forward power, a signal representative of the measured value is sent to the BRC via
the SPI bus. The BRC determines if this level is within tolerance of the programmed
forward power level. If the level is not within parameters, the BRC will issue a warning to
the site controller which, in turn, will shut down the Exciter if required.
Reflected power is monitored in the same manner. The BRC uses the reflected power to
calculate the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR). If the VSWR is determined to be
excessive, the forward power is rolled back. . If it is extremely excessive, the BRC issues
a shut-down command to the Exciter.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 9 E10 D
11/9/2000
4-11
y
Theory of Operation
A thermistor is located on the RF Combiner/Peripheral module to monitor the operating
temperature of the PA. The thermistor signal indicating excessive temperature is applied
to the A/D converter and then sent to the BRC. The BRC rolls back forward power if the
monitored temperature is excessive.
900 MHz
The combined LFM output is applied to this module. The RF signal is first passed through
a directional coupler which derives a signal sample of the LFM RF power output. Via the
coupler, a sample of the RF output signal is fed to the Exciter as a feedback signal, thereby
allowing the Exciter to accordingly adjust signal drive. Following the coupler, the power
output signal is passed through a circulator, which protects the PA in the event of high
reflected power.
A power monitor circuit monitors the forward and reflected power of the output signal.
This circuit furnishes the A/D converter on the DC/Metering Board with input signals
representative of the forward and reflected power levels.
For forward power, a signal representative of the measured value is sent to the BRC via
the SPI bus. The BRC determines if this level is within tolerance of the programmed
forward power level. If the level is not within parameters, the BRC will issue a warning to
the site controller which, in turn, will shut down the Exciter if required.
Reflected power is monitored in the same manner. The BRC uses the reflected power to
calculate the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR). If the VSWR is determined to be
excessive, the forward power is rolled back. If it is extremely excessive, the BRC issues a
shut-down command to the Exciter.
A thermistor is located on the RF Combiner/Peripheral module to monitor the operating
temperature of the PA. A voltage representative of the monitored temperature is sent from
the A/D converter to the BRC. The BRC rolls back forward power if the monitored
temperature is excessive.
1500 MHz
Both LFM outputs are input into this module where they are combined for a single output
signal. The RF signal is first coupled to the Exciter module so that it can be monitored.
The RF output signal is then passed through a circulator that acts as a protection device for
the PA in the event of reflected power.
A power monitor circuit monitors the forward and reflected power of the output signal.
This circuit provides the A/D converter on the DC/Metering board with an input signal
representative of the forward or reflected power levels.
For forward power, a signal representative of the measured value is sent to the BRC
module via the SPI bus. The BRC determines if this level is within tolerance of the
programmed forward power level. The programmed forward power is set through the use
of MMI commands. If the level is not within certain parameters, the BRC will issue a
warning to the site controller and may shut-down the Exciter module.
Reflected power is monitored in the same manner except that the BRC determines an
acceptable reflected power level. The BRC calculates the reflected power through an
algorithm stored in memory. If the reflected power is determined to be excessive, the
forward power is rolled back. If the reflected power level is extremely excessive, the BRC
will issues a shut-down command to the Exciter module.
4-12
68P81099E10 D 11/9/200 0
y
Theory of Operation
A thermistor is located on the RF Combiner/Peripheral module to monitor the operating
temperature of the Power Amplifier. A voltage representative of the monitored
temperature is sent from the A/D converter to the BRC. The BRC issues a cut-back
command to the Exciter module if the monitored temperature is greater than 121û F (85û
C).
Fan Module
The PA contains a fan assembly to maintain normal operating temperature through the use
of a cool air intake. The fan assembly consists of three individual fans in which airflow is
directed across the PA heatsink.
The current draw of the fans is monitored by the DC/Metering Board. A voltage
representative of the current draw is monitored by the BRC. The BRC flags the iSC if an
alarm is triggered. The PA LED on the front panel of the BRC also lights, however the PA
does not shut down.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 9 E10 D
11/9/2000
4-13
y
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
4-14
68P81099E10 D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Power Amplifier
40W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier – TLF2020 (TTF1580)
Functional Block Diagram
ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY,
& A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
LINEAR DRIVER MODULE
INTERCONNECT
BOARD
RF SPLITTER/DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
LINEAR FINAL
MODULES
RF
INTERCONNECT
BOARD
STAGE
RF INPUT
CLASS AB
STAGE 2
CLASS AB
DC
FILTER
CLK/DATA
+28 VDC
50 OHM
LOAD
CHIP SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
CHIP SELECT
MEMORY
50 OHM
LOAD
SPI BUS
TO/FROM BRC
CHIP
SELECT
ADDRESS BUS
FROM BRC
FAN ASSEMBLY
FAN SENSE
BOARD SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
A/D
CONVERTER
PA TEMP SENSE
FWD PWR
REF PWR
RF COMBINER/
PERIPHERAL MODULE
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
LOW-PASS
FILTER
50 OHM
LOAD
RF OUT
TO ANTENNA
STAGE 3
CLASS AB
50 OHM
LOAD
CIRCULATOR
50 OHM
LOAD
RF FEEDBACK
TO EXCITER
MODULE
EBTS611
051398LLN
Figure:4-5
6 8 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
4/1/2000
TLF2020 (TTF1580B) 40 W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier
Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 1)
4-15
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Power Amplifier
70W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier – TLN3335 (CTF1040)
Functional Block Diagram
RF SPLITTER/DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
LINEAR FINAL
MODULES
COMBINER
BOARD
50 OHM
LOAD
ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY,
& A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
LINEAR DRIVER MODULE
INTERCONNECT
BOARD
STAGE
RF INPUT
CLASS AB
50 OHM
LOAD
DC
FILTER
CLK/DATA
50 OHM
LOAD
50 OHM
LOAD
STAGE 2
CLASS AB
CHIP SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
50 OHM
LOAD
MEMORY
CHIP SELECT
SPI BUS
TO/FROM BRC
+28 VDC
CHIP
SELECT
ADDRESS BUS
FROM BRC
FAN ASSEMBLY
FAN SENSE
A/D
CONVERTER
50 OHM
LOAD
BOARD SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
PA TEMP SENSE
FWD PWR
REF PWR
50 OHM
LOAD
RF COMBINER/
PERIPHERAL MODULE
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
50 OHM
LOAD
LOW-PASS
FILTER
RF OUT
TO ANTENNA
50 OHM
LOAD
RF FEEDBACK
TO EXCITER
MODULE
Figure:4-6
4-16
50 OHM
LOAD
50 OHM
LOAD
CIRCULATOR
STAGE 3
CLASS AB
TLN3335 (CTF1040) 70 W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier
Functional Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 1)
EBTS417
120497JNM
68P 81095E 02-D
4/ 1/ 2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Power Amplifier
60W, 900 MHz Power Amplifier – CLN1355 (CLF1300)
Functional Block Diagram
LINEAR DRIVER MODULE
STAGE
RF INPUT
CLASS A
RF SPLITTER/
DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
STAGE
STAGE
CLASS AB
CLASS AB
LINEAR FINAL MODULE
50 OHM
LOAD
ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY,
& A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
50 OHM
LOAD
CLK/DATA
CHIP SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
CHIP SELECT
MEMORY
50 OHM
LOAD
SPI BUS
TO/FROM BRC
CHIP
SELECT
LINEAR FINAL MODULE
50 OHM
LOAD
ADDRESS BUS
FROM BRC
FAN ASSEMBLY
FAN SENSE
BOARD SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
A/D
CONVERTER
PA TEMP SENSE
FWD PWR
REF PWR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
LOW-PASS
FILTER
50 OHM
LOAD
RF OUT
TO ANTENNA
50 OHM
LOAD
RF COMBINER/
PERIPHERAL MODULE
50 OHM
LOAD
CIRCULATOR
RF FEEDBACK
TO EXCITER
MODULE
EBTS326
011497JNM
Figure:4-7
6 8 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
4/1/2000
60W, 900 MHz Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 1)
4-17
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Power Amplifier
40W, 1500 MHz Power Amplifier – TLN3426
Functional Block Diagram
Power Amplifier
Functional Block Diagram
Model TLN3426
ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY,
& A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
LINEAR DRIVER MODULE
TLG4020
STAGE
RF INPUT
STAGE
STAGE
CLASS AB
CLASS AB
CHIP SELECT
(Q5433)
50 OHM
LOAD
CHIP SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
(U5000)
CLASS AB
50 OHM
LOAD
MEMORY
(U5004)
(Q5433)
50 OHM
LOAD
SPI BUS
TO/FROM BRC
LINEAR FINAL MODULE
TLG4021
STAGE
LDM CURRENT SENSE
CLASS A
RF SPLITTER/
DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
TLG4023
LFM CURRENT SENSE
CHIP
SELECT
ADDRESS BUS
FROM BRC
LINEAR FINAL MODULE
TLG4021
FAN ASSEMBLY
LDM/LFM CURRENT SENSE
FAN SENSE
BOARD SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
(U5000)
A/D
CONVERTER
(U5100)
PA TEMP SENSE
FAN
FAN
FAN
(Q5417)
FWD PWR
REF PWR
(Q5417)
50 OHM
LOAD
RF OUT
TO ANTENNA
RF COMBINER/
PERIPHERAL MODULE
TLG4022
50 OHM
LOAD
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
(RT5401)
LOW-PASS
FILTER
50 OHM
LOAD
CIRCULATOR
Figure:4-8
4-18
50 OHM
LOAD
RF FEEDBACK
TO EXCITER
MODULE
Power
Amplifier
68P 81095E 02-D
4/ 1/ 2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Power Amplifier
800 MHz QUAD Carrier Power Amplifier
Functional Block Diagram
RF SPLITTER/DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
LINEAR FINAL
MODULES
COMBINER
BOARD
50 OHM
LOAD
ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY,
& A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
LINEAR DRIVER MODULE
INTERCONNECT
BOARD
STAGE
RF INPUT
CLASS AB
50 OHM
LOAD
DC
FILTER
CLK/DATA
50 OHM
LOAD
50 OHM
LOAD
STAGE 2
CLASS AB
CHIP SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
50 OHM
LOAD
MEMORY
CHIP SELECT
SPI BUS
TO/FROM BRC
+28 VDC
CHIP
SELECT
ADDRESS BUS
FROM BRC
FAN ASSEMBLY
FAN SENSE
A/D
CONVERTER
50 OHM
LOAD
BOARD SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
PA TEMP SENSE
FWD PWR
REF PWR
50 OHM
LOAD
RF COMBINER/
PERIPHERAL MODULE
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
50 OHM
LOAD
LOW-PASS
FILTER
RF OUT
TO ANTENNA
50 OHM
LOAD
50 OHM
LOAD
CIRCULATOR
STAGE 3
CLASS AB
DUAL Stage Isolator
50 OHM
LOAD
RF FEEDBACK
TO EXCITER
MODULE
Figure:4-9
6 8 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
11/9//2000
QUAD Channel Power Amplifier Functional Block
Diagram (Sheet 1 of 1)
EBTS417
120497JNM
4-19
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Power Amplifier
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
4-20
68P 81095E 02-D
11/ 9/ / 2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
5 DC Power Supply
Overview
This section provides technical information for the DC Power Supply (PS). Table
5-1 describes covered topics.
Table 5-1
Chapter Topics
Chapter
Page
Description
DC Power Supply for Single Channel Base Radios
5-22
Describes the functions and characteristics of the DC Power
Supply (PS) module for the single channel Base Radio (BR).
Single Channel DC Power Supply
5-29
Describes the functions and characteristics of the DC Power
Supply (PS) module for the QUAD channel Base Radio (BR).
Single Channel DC Power Supply
5-30
Functional Block Diagram for the Single Channel DC Power
Supply (PS)
QUAD Channel Power Supply
5-31
Functional Block Diagram for the QUAD Channel DC Power
Supply (PS)
FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Reference
DC Power Supply Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) are available for the iDEN
EBTS. The FRU contains the Power Supply kit and required packaging. Table 5-2
provides a cross reference between Exciter FRU numbers and kit numbers.
Table 5-2
Description
FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Referece
FRU Number
Kit Number
Single Channel DC Power Supply
TLN3338
CPN1027
QUAD Channel DC Power Supply
CLN1498
CLF1550
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
5-21
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
DC Power Supply for Single Channel Base Radios
DC Power Supply for Single Channel
Base Radios
DC Power Supply Overview
The DC Power Supply provides DC operating voltages to QUAD Channel Base
Radio FRUs. The power supply accepts input voltage sources from 41Vdc to
60Vdc. Input sources may be either positively or negatively grounded.
On initial startup, the supply requires a nominal 43 Vdc. If the voltage drops
below 41 V, the DC Power Supply enters quiescent mode. In quiescent mode, the
power supply outputs no power.
The DC Power Supply is designed for sites with an available DC voltage source.
Output voltages from the DC Power Supply are 28.6 Vdc, 14.2 Vdc and 5.1 Vdc,
with reference to output ground. The supply is rated for 575 Watts of continuous
output power, with up to 113û F (45û C) inlet air. At 140û F (60û C), the 28.6 Vdc
output reduces to 80% of maximum power.
The DC Power Supply consists of the Power Supply and front panel hardware.
The DC Power Supply connects to the chassis backplane through an edgecard
connector. Two Torx screws on the front panel secure the DC power supply to the
chassis.
Figure 5-1 shows the DC Power Supply with the cover removed.
Controls and Indicators
Table 5-3 summarizes LED indications on the DC Power Supply during normal
operation. The ON/OFF switch behind the front panel turns DC power supply on
and off.
Table 5-3
LED
Green
Red
DC Power Supply Indicators
Condition
Indications
Solid (on)
Power Supply is on, and operating under normal conditions with
no alarms
Off
Power Supply is turned off or required power is not available
Solid (on)
Power Supply fault or load fault on any output, or input voltage is
out of range
Off
Power Supply is operating normally, with no alarms
Performance Specifications
Table 5-4 lists the speciÞcations for the DC Power Supply.
5-22
68P81095E02- D 4/16/9 9
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
DC Power Supply for Single Channel Base Radios
Figure:5-1
DC Power Supply
Table 5-4
DC Power Supply Specifications
Value or Range
Description
Operating Temperature
0¡ to +40¡ C (no derating)
+41¡ to +60¡ C (derating)
Input Voltage
41 to 60 Vdc
Input Polarity
Positive (+) ground system
Startup Voltage
43 Vdc (minimum)
Input Current
15.6 A (maximum) @ 41 Vdc
Steady State Output Voltages
28.6 Vdc +5%
14.2 Vdc +5%
5.1 Vdc +5%
Total Output Power Rating
575 W (no derating)
485 W (derating)
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
5-23
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
DC Power Supply for Single Channel Base Radios
Table 5-4
DC Power Supply Specifications (Continued)
Description
Output Ripple
Value or Range
All outputs 50mV p-p (measured with
20 MHz BW oscilloscope at 25¡C)
High Frequency individual harmonic voltage
limits (10kHz to 100MHz) are:
Short Circuit Current
28.6 Vdc
1.5 mV p-p
14.2 Vdc
3.0 mV p-p
5.1 Vdc
5.0 mV p-p
0.5 A average (maximum)
Theory of Operation
Table 5-5 brießy describes the basic DC Power Supply circuitry. Figure 5-3 shows
the functional block diagrams for the DC Power Supply.
Table 5-5
DC Power Supply Circuitry
Circuit
5-24
Description
Input Circuit
Routes input current from the DC power input cable through the
high current printed circuit edge connector, EMI Þlter, panel mounted
combination circuit breaker, and on/off switch
Startup Inverter
Circuitry
Provides Vdc for power supply circuitry during initial power-up
Main Inverter Circuitry
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +28.6 Vdc
supply voltage
Temperature Protection
The Power Supply contains a built-in cooling fan that runs whenever
the supply is powered on. The supply shuts down if the temperature
exceeds a preset threshold
+14.2 Vdc Secondary
Converter Circuitry
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +14.2 Vdc
supply voltage
+5 Vdc Secondary
Converter Circuitry
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +5.1 Vdc
supply voltage
Clock Generator
Circuitry
Generates the 267 kHz and 133 kHz clock signals used by the pulse
width modulators in the four inverter circuits
Address Decode,
Memory, & A/D
Converter
Serves as the main interface between A/D on the Power Supply and
the BRC via the SPI bus
68P81095E02- D 4/16/9 9
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
DC Power Supply for QUAD Channel Base Radios
DC Power Supply for QUAD Channel
Base Radios
QUAD Channel Power Supply Overview
The QUAD Channel DC Power Supply provides DC operating voltages to QUAD
Channel Base Radio FRUs. The power supply accepts input voltage sources from
41Vdc to 60Vdc. Input sources may be either positively or negatively grounded.
On initial startup, the supply requires a nominal 43 Vdc. If the voltage drops
below 41 V, the QUAD Channel DC Power Supply enters quiescent mode. In
quiescent mode, the power supply outputs no power.
The QUAD Channel DC Power Supply is designed for sites with an available DC
voltage source. Output voltages from the DC Power Supply are 28.6 Vdc, 14.2 Vdc
and 3.3 Vdc, with reference to output ground. The supply is rated for 575 Watts of
continuous output power, with up to 113û F (45û C) inlet air. At 140û F (60û C), the
28.6 Vdc output reduces to 80% of maximum power.
The QUAD Channel DC Power Supply consists of the Power Supply and front
panel hardware. The QUAD Channel DC Power Supply connects to the chassis
backplane through an edgecard connector. Two Torx screws on the front panel
secure the QUAD Channel DC power supply to the chassis.
Figure 5-2 shows the QUAD Channel Power Supply with the cover removed.
Controls and Indicators
Table 5-6 summarizes LED indications on the QUAD Channel DC Power Supply
during normal operation. The ON/OFF switch behind the front panel turns DC
power supply on and off.
Table 5-6
LED
Green
Red
DC Power Supply Indicators
Condition
Indications
Solid (on)
Power Supply is on, and operating under normal conditions with
no alarms
Off
Power Supply is turned off or required power is not available
Solid (on)
Power Supply fault or load fault on any output, or input voltage is
out of range
Off
Power Supply is operating normally, with no alarms
Performance Specifications
Table 5-7 lists the speciÞcations for the QUAD Channel DC Power Supply.
68 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
5-25
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
DC Power Supply for QUAD Channel Base Radios
Figure:5-2
Quad Carrier Power Supply
Table 5-7
DC Power Supply Specifications
Value or Range
Description
Operating Temperature
0¡ to +40¡ C (no derating)
+41¡ to +60¡ C (derating)
Input Voltage
41 to 60 Vdc
Input Polarity
Positive (+) ground system
Startup Voltage
43 Vdc (minimum)
Input Current
18.0 A (maximum) @ 41 Vdc
Steady State Output Voltages
28.6 Vdc +5%
14.2 Vdc +5%
3.3 Vdc +5%
Total Output Power Rating
575 W (no derating)
485 W (derating)
5-26
68P81095E02- D 4/16/99
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
DC Power Supply for QUAD Channel Base Radios
Table 5-7
DC Power Supply Specifications (Continued)
Description
Output Ripple
Value or Range
All outputs 150mV p-p (measured with
20 MHz BW oscilloscope at 25¡C)
High Frequency individual harmonic voltage
limits (10kHz to 100MHz) are:
Short Circuit Current
28.6 Vdc
1.5 mV p-p
14.2 Vdc
3.0 mV p-p
3.3 Vdc
5.0 mV p-p
0.5 A average (maximum)
Theory of Operation
Table 5-8 brießy describes the basic DC Power Supply circuitry. Figure 5-5 shows
the functional block diagrams for the DC Power Supply.
Table 5-8
DC Power Supply Circuitry
Circuit
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
11/9/2000
Description
Input Circuit
Routes input current from the DC power input cable through the
high current printed circuit edge connector, EMI Þlter, panel mounted
combination circuit breaker, and on/off switch
Startup Inverter
Circuitry
Provides Vdc for power supply circuitry during initial power-up
Main Inverter Circuitry
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +28.6 Vdc
supply voltage
Temperature Protection
The Power Supply contains a built-in cooling fan that runs whenever
the supply is powered on. The supply shuts down if the temperature
exceeds a preset threshold
+14.2 Vdc Secondary
Converter Circuitry
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +14.2 Vdc
supply voltage
+3.3 Vdc Secondary
Converter Circuitry
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +3.3 Vdc
supply voltage
Clock Generator
Circuitry
Generates the 267 kHz and 133 kHz clock signals used by the pulse
width modulators in the four inverter circuits
Address Decode,
Memory, & A/D
Converter
Serves as the main interface between A/D on the Power Supply and
the BRC via the SPI bus
5-27
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
5-28
68P81095E02- D 11/9/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
DC Power Supply
Single Channel DC Power Supply
MAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRY
MAIN ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
MOD FAIL
SOFTSTART
CIRCUITRY
+28 V BULK TO
DIAGNOSTICS
CIRCUITRY
SHUTDOWN
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
POWER FET
SWITCHES
TRANSISTOR
DRIVERS
P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
+28.6 VDC
TO
STATION
MODULES
VIA
BACKPLANE
+28.6 VDC
FILTERING
CIRCUITRY
14
15
VCC
267 KHZ
133 KHZ
133 KHZ
+28.6 V OVERVOLTAGE
DETECT
VCC
INPUT FILTER BOARD
REF
FRONT PANEL
ON / OFF
SWITCH
CURRENT
DETECT
OVERCURRENT
DETECT
REF
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
EXTERNAL
DC INPUT
41-60 VDC
+12V STARTUP BIAS
+28 V BULK
+14.2 V INVERTER CIRCUITRY
+14.2V
POWER FET
SWITCH
VCC
P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
+14.2V
+14.2V DC
TO
STATION
MODULES
VIA
BACKPLANE
16
17
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
22
23
133 KHZ
VCC
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
STARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITRY
VCC
VCC
STARTUP ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
FET
DRIVER
FET
+ 14.2V OVERCURRENT
DETECT
OVERVOLTAGE
DETECT
+12V STARTUP BIAS
REF
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH
SURGE CURRENT
DELAY
CROWBAR
CIRCUIT
REF
133 KHZ
REF
BULK DETECT
TO
DIAGNOSTICS
CIRCUITRY
+ 28V BULK
+5.1 V INVERTER CIRCUITRY
P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
133 KHZ
POWER FET
SWITCH
VCC
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
VCC
267 KHZ
133 KHZ
÷2
+5.1 V DC
TO
STATION
MODULES
VIA
BACKPLANE
24
25
30
31
267 KHZ
CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUITRY
CLOCK
GENERATOR
CIRCUITRY
+5.1 V
133 KHZ
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
FET
DRIVER
133 KHZ
FET
+ 5V OVERCURRENT
DETECT
OVERVOLTAGE
DETECT
REF
SURGE CURRENT
DELAY
REF
CROWBAR
CIRCUIT
267 KHZ
REF
EBTS323
011497JNM
Figure:5-3
6 8 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
11/9/2000
DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 2)
5-29
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
DC Power Supply
DC Power Supply
REF
DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY
MODULE
FAIL
(RED)
REF
INPUT GOOD
(GREEN)
MOD FAIL
BULK DETECT
FROM STARTUP
INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
INPUT FAIL
REF
HEATSINK STATUS
DETECT
HEATSINK DIAG
REF
VBAT DIAG
HI-TEMP
DETECT
(FOR AC ONLY)
FROM BATTERY
CHARGER/REVERT
CIRCUITRY
REF
BAT TEMP
SPI BUS
A/D
CONVERTER
J300
REF
T°
COOLING
FAN
SPI BUS
TO/FROM
STATION CONTROL
MODULE
+5.1 V
THERMISTOR
MOUNTED ON
HEATSINK
+14.2V DIAG
FROM
DETECT
CIRCUITRY
+5.1 V DIAG
+28.6 V DIAG
ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY
FROM
STATION
CONTROL
BOARD
P/O ADDRESS BUS
ADDRESS
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
ENABLE
ENABLE
EBTS324
012097JNM
Figure:5-4
5-30
DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2)
68P 81095E 02-D
11/ 9/ 2000
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
DC Power Supply
QUAD Channel Power Supply
MAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRY
MAIN ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
MOD FAIL
SOFTSTART
CIRCUITRY
+28 V BULK TO
DIAGNOSTICS
CIRCUITRY
SHUTDOWN
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
POWER FET
SWITCHES
TRANSISTOR
DRIVERS
P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
+28.6 VDC
TO
STATION
MODULES
VIA
BACKPLANE
+28.6 VDC
FILTERING
CIRCUITRY
14
15
VCC
267 KHZ
133 KHZ
133 KHZ
+28.6 V OVERVOLTAGE
DETECT
VCC
INPUT FILTER BOARD
REF
FRONT PANEL
ON / OFF
SWITCH
CURRENT
DETECT
OVERCURRENT
DETECT
REF
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
EXTERNAL
DC INPUT
41-60 VDC
+12V STARTUP BIAS
+28 V BULK
+14.2 V INVERTER CIRCUITRY
+14.2V
POWER FET
SWITCH
VCC
P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
+14.2V
+14.2V DC
TO
STATION
MODULES
VIA
BACKPLANE
16
17
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
22
23
133 KHZ
VCC
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
STARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITRY
VCC
VCC
STARTUP ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
FET
DRIVER
FET
+ 14.2V OVERCURRENT
DETECT
OVERVOLTAGE
DETECT
+12V STARTUP BIAS
REF
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH
SURGE CURRENT
DELAY
CROWBAR
CIRCUIT
REF
133 KHZ
REF
BULK DETECT
TO
DIAGNOSTICS
CIRCUITRY
+ 28V BULK
+3.3 V INVERTER CIRCUITRY
P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
133 KHZ
POWER FET
SWITCH
VCC
VCC
267 KHZ
133 KHZ
÷2
+3.3 V DC
TO
STATION
MODULES
VIA
BACKPLANE
24
25
30
31
267 KHZ
CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUITRY
CLOCK
GENERATOR
CIRCUITRY
+3.3 V
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
133 KHZ
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
FET
DRIVER
133 KHZ
FET
+ 3.3V OVERCURRENT
DETECT
OVERVOLTAGE
DETECT
REF
SURGE CURRENT
DELAY
REF
CROWBAR
CIRCUIT
267 KHZ
REF
EBTS323Q
101900 spf
Figure:5-5
5-31
QUAD Channel DC Power Supply Functional Block
Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 2)
68P 81095E 02-D
11/ 9/ 2000
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
DC Power Supply
QUAD Channel DC Power Supply
REF
DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY
MODULE
FAIL
(RED)
REF
INPUT GOOD
(GREEN)
MOD FAIL
ULK DETECT
OM STARTUP
INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
INPUT FAIL
REF
HEATSINK STATUS
DETECT
HEATSINK DIAG
REF
VBAT DIAG
HI-TEMP
DETECT
(FOR AC ONLY)
FROM BATTERY
CHARGER/REVERT
CIRCUITRY
REF
BAT TEMP
SPI BUS
A/D
CONVERTER
J300
REF
T°
COOLING
FAN
SPI BUS
TO/FROM
STATION CONTROL
MODULE
+3.3 V
THERMISTOR
MOUNTED ON
HEATSINK
+14.2V DIAG
FROM
DETECT
CIRCUITRY
+3.3 V DIAG
+28.6 V DIAG
ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY
P/O ADDRESS BUS
ADDRESS
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
ENABLE
ENABLE
EBTS324Q
101900spf
Figure:5-6
5-32
QUAD Channel DC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2)
68P 81095E 02-D
11/ 9/ 2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
6 AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply Overview
The AC Power Supply provides DC operating voltages for the Base Radio FRUs.
The AC Power Supply accepts an AC input (90 to 280 Vac @ 47 to 63 Hz) to
generate three output voltages: 28.6 Vdc, 14.2 Vdc and 5.1 Vdc with reference to
output ground. The AC Power Supply automatically adjusts to the AC input
ranges and supplies a steady output.
The AC Power Supply contains several switching-type power supply circuits,
power factor correction circuitry, battery charger/revert circuitry, diagnostics and
monitoring circuitry.
The battery charging/revert circuitry charges an external storage battery and
automatically reverts to battery power in case of an AC power failure.
The Power Supply interconnects to the chassis backplane using an edgecard
connector. Two Torx screws on the front panel of the AC Power Supply secure it
in the chassis.
Figure 6-1 shows the front view of the AC Power Supply.
Controls and Indicators
Table 6-1 lists and describes the indicators of the AC Power Supply. The power
ON/OFF switch is used to turn the power supply on and off.
Table 6-1
LED
Green
Red
AC Power Supply Indicators
Condition
Indications
Solid (on)
Power Supply under normal operation with no alarms (the red
LED is normally off when this LED is lit)
Off
Power Supply is turned off or required power is not available
Solid (on)
In battery revert mode, Power Supply fault, or load fault on any
output
Off
The Power Supply is under normal operation with no alarms
Performance Specifications
Table 6-2 lists the speciÞcations for the AC Power Supply.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
6-33
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Figure:6-1
Table 6-2
AC Power Supply (front view)
AC Power Supply Specifications
Description
Operating Temperature
Value or Range
-30¡ to +45¡ C (no derating)
-30¡ to +60¡ C (derating)
Input Voltage
90 to 280 Vac
Input Frequency Range
47 to 63 Hz
Input Current
8.5 A (maximum)
Steady State Output Voltages
28.6 Vdc +5%
14.2 Vdc +5%
5.1 Vdc +5%
Total Output Power Rating
625 W (no derating)*
595 W (derating)*
Battery Charging Voltage Range
6-34
26 to 32.5 Vdc
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Table 6-2
AC Power Supply Specifications
Description
Value or Range
Output Ripple
All outputs 50 mV p-p (measured with 20 MHz BW
oscilloscope at 25¡C)
High Frequency individual harmonic voltage limits
(10 kHz to 100 MHz) are:
Short Circuit Current
28.6 Vdc
1.5 mV p-p
14.2 Vdc
3 mV p-p
5.1 Vdc
5 mV p-p
0.5 A average (maximum)
* Includes 50 W for the battery charger.
Theory of Operation
Table 6-3 brießy describes the basic AC Power Supply circuitry. Figure 6-2 shows
the functional block diagrams for the AC Power Supply.
Table 6-3
AC Power Supply Circuitry
Circuit
Description
Input Conditioning
Circuitry
Consists of ac line transient protection, EMI Þltering, rectiÞer, power
factor correction circuitry, and Þltering
Start-up Inverter
Circuitry
Provides Vcc for power supply circuitry during initial power-up
Main Inverter Circuitry
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +28.6Vdc
supply voltage
Temperature Protection
Contains a built-in thermostatically controlled cooling fan. The
Power Supply shuts down if temperature exceeds a preset threshold
+14.2 Vdc Secondary
Converter Circuitry
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +14.2 Vdc
supply voltage
+5 Vdc Secondary
Converter Circuitry
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +5 Vdc
supply voltage
Clock Generator
Circuitry
Generates 267 kHz and 133 kHz clock signals for the pulse width
modulators in the four inverter circuits
Diagnostics Circuitry
Converts analog status signals to digital format for transfer to BRC
Address Decode,
Memory, & A/D
Converter
Serves as the main interface between A/D and D/A on the Power
Supply and the BRC via the SPI bus
Battery Charging/
Revert Circuitry
Offers features such as output short circuit protection, reversed
battery protection, ambient battery temperature monitoring, and
immediate revert to battery backup leaving no interruption of station
operation
In the event of an AC power failure, a battery revert relay is energized
which places the storage battery on the +28 V bus which maintains
station operation under backup power. An SCR in parallel with the
relay contacts provides instant battery revert and protection for the
relay contacts against arcing
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
6-35
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
6-36
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
MAIN ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
MAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRY
133 KHZ
133 KHZ
SOFTSTART
CIRCUITRY
SHUTDOWN
MOD FAIL
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
POWER FET
SWITCHES
TRANSISTOR
DRIVERS
+28 V BULK TO
DIAGNOSTICS
CIRCUITRY
VCC
267 KHZ
VCC
FILTERING
CIRCUITRY
INPUT FILTER BOARD
+28.6 VDC
+28.6 V OVERVOLTAGE
DETECT
REF
FRONT PANEL
ON / OFF
SWITCH
FULL WAVE
BRIDGE
RECTIFIER
67 KHZ
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
TRANSISTOR
DRIVER
+12V STARTUP BIAS
+28.6 VDC
TO
STATION
MODULES
VIA
14 BACKPLANE
15
REF
APPROX. 400 VDC
FET
SWITCHES
OVERCURRENT
DETECT
CURRENT
DETECT
TRANSIENT / EMI
PROTECTION
CIRCUITRY
AC INPUT
47 - 60 HZ
90V / 280V AC
P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
+ 28V BULK
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION /
BOOST CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
+14.2 V INVERTER CIRCUITRY
P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
+14.2V
POWER FET
SWITCH
STARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITRY
VCC
VCC
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
STARTUP ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
VCC
+12V STARTUP BIAS
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
+14.2V
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
133 KHZ
VCC
FET
FET
DRIVER
OVERVOLTAGE
DETECT
+ 14.2V OVERCURRENT
DETECT
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH
REF
133 KHZ
CROWBAR
CIRCUIT
REF
SURGE CURRENT
DELAY
+ 28V BULK
133 KHZ
+5.1V INVERTER CIRCUITRY
POWER FET
SWITCH
267 KHZ
267 KHZ
+5.1V
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
267 KHZ
VCC
CLOCK
GENERATOR
CIRCUITRY
133 KHZ
÷2
+14.2V DC
TO
STATION
MODULES
VIA
22 BACKPLANE
23
REF
BULK DETECT
TO
DIAGNOSTICS
CIRCUITRY
CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUITRY
16
17
133 KHZ
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
VCC
133 KHZ
FET
FET
DRIVER
OVERVOLTAGE
DETECT
+ 5V OVERCURRENT
DETECT
REF
24
25
+5.1V DC
TO
STATION
MODULES
VIA
30 BACKPLANE
31
CROWBAR
CIRCUIT
REF
SURGE CURRENT
DELAY
P/O
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
REF
EBTS009
051594JNM
Figure:6-2
6 8 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
4/1/2000
AC Power Supply Functional
Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
6-37
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
BATTERY CHARGING / REVERT CIRCUITRY
SCR
APPROX. 33 V DC
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
POWER FET
SWITCH
FILTERING
CIRCUITRY
BATTERY
REVERT
RELAY
133 KHZ
PULSE
WIDTH
MODULATOR
CHARGER OUTPUT
SELECT LINES
SPI BUS
(CLOCK & DATA)
D/A
CONVERTER
1 PPS
FROM SCM
STATION
CONTROL
MODULE
FAIL DETECT
FET
DRIVER
RELAY
CONTROL
CIRCUITRY
AC FAIL
STORAGE
BATTERY
VBAT DIAG
TO DIAGNOSTICS
CIRCUITRY
133 KHZ
SHUTDOWN
FROM CLOCK
GENERATOR
CIRCUITRY
SPI BUS
(CLOCK & DATA)
DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY
REF
MODULE
FAIL
(RED)
REF
AC ON
(GREEN)
MOD FAIL
BULK DETECT
FROM STARTUP
INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
AC FAIL
REF
RIPPLE
DETECT
CIRCUITRY
+ 28V BULK
FROM MAIN
INVERTER
CIRCUITRY
28 RIPPLE
HEATSINK STATUS
DETECT
HEATSINK DIAG
REF
VBAT DIAG
HI-TEMP
DETECT
REF
FROM BATTERY
CHARGER/REVERT
CIRCUITRY
BAT TEMP
FAN ON
FAN CONTROL
REF
FET
SWITCH
A/D
CONVERTER
SPI BUS
SPI BUS
TO/FROM
STATION
CONTROL
MODULE
COOLING
FAN
+5V
T°
THERMISTOR
MOUNTED ON
HEATSINK
FAN FAULT
DETECT
ENABLE
FAN FAIL
+14.2V DIAG
ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY
FROM
DETECT
CIRCUITRY
+5.1V DIAG
+28.6V DIAG
FROM
STATION
CONTROL
BOARD
P/O ADDRESS BUS
ADDRESS
DECODE
CIRCUITRY
ENABLE
ENABLE
EBTS010
042594JNM
Figure:6-2
6-38
AC Power Supply Functional Block Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 2)
68P 81095E 02-D
4/ 1/ 2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
7 Receiver
Overview
This section provides technical information for the Receiver (RX). Table 7-1
describes covered topics.
Table 7-1
Chapter Topics
Chapter
Page
Description
800 MHz 3X Receiver Ð CLN1283;
900 MHz 3X Receiver Ð CLN1356
7-40
Describes the functions and characteristics of the Receiver
(RX) module for the 800 MHz and 900 MHz single channel
Base Radio (BR).
1500 MHz Receiver Ð TLN3427
7-47
Describes the functions and characteristics of the Receiver
(RX) module module for the 1500 MHz single channel Base
Radio (BR).
800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver Ð CLN1283;
7-51
Describes the functions and characteristics of the Receiver
(RX) module module for the 800 MHz QUAD channel Base
Radio (BR).
3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram
7-57
Functional Block Diagram for the Single Channel Base Radio
Receiver (RX)
1500 MHz Receiver Functional Block Diagram
7-58
Functional Block Diagram for the QUAD Channel Base
Radio Controller (BRC)
3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram
7-59
Functional Block Diagram for the QUAD Channel Base
Radio Receiver (RX)
FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Reference
Receiver (RX) Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) are available for the iDEN EBTS.
The FRU contains the RX kit and required packaging. Table 7-2 provides a cross
reference between RX FRU numbers and kit numbers.
Table 7-2
FRU Number to Kit Number Cross Referece
FRU Number
Kit Number
3 branch Receiver for 800 MHz Single Channel BR
CLN1283
CLF1470
3 branch Receiver for 900 MHz Single Channel BR
CLN1356
CLF1480
Receiver for 1500 MHz Single Channel BR
TLN3427
CRX1020
3 branch Receiver for 800 MHz QUAD Channel BR
CLN1496
CLF1550
Description
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
7-39
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356
800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283;
900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356
Overview
The 3X Receiver provides the receiver functions for the Base Radio. It consists of a
receiver board, a slide-in housing, and associated hardware. The 3X Receiver
incorporates one to three diversity branches on a single module. Figure 7-1 shows
a top view of the Receiver with the cover removed.
Figure:7-1
QUAD Channel Receiver (with cover removed)
Definition and Identification
The 3X receiver kit contains three receivers on a single board. This allows a single
module to provide three-branch diversity BR functionality. To identify 3X
receiver boards in the EBTS, use the MMI command get_rx1_kit_no . This
command can be used on all receiver models, and reports the kit number from the
receiverÕs EEPROM. The 3X receiver can also be identiÞed by visual inspection of
the front panel. Because the 3X receiver can only be inserted into the middle
7-40
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356
receiver slot, the front panel of a 3X receiver reads: INSERT ONLY IN SLOT RX2
WITH BACKPLANE 0183625X 3X RECEIVER .
The two remaining receiver slots are covered with blank panels. A summary of
the Receiver FRUs available for the Base Radio is provided in the chart below.
Table 7-3
Receiver FRUs
Receiver FRUs
Chassis FRUs
3X Receiver:
With 3x Receiver Backplane:
800 MHz
CLN1283
800 MHz
CLN1282
900 MHz
CLN1356
900 MHz
N/A
Single Receiver:
800 MHz
TLN3336
900 MHz
N/A
With Single Receiver
Backplane:
800 MHz
TLN3333
900 MHz
N/A
Replacement Compatibility
The 3X Receiver board (CRF6010 or CRF6030) can only be used in receive slot 2
(middle receiver slot) with backplane 0183625X _ _. The backplane connector is
different than the TRF6560 version of the receiver board. This is why there is a
need for a new backplane. The receiver will function only when it is installed in
slot 2. The TRF6560 receiver will not make electrical connection in any slot of the
new backplane. Compatibility between the new and old receiver boards is
summarized in Tables 7-4 and 7-5 for 800 MHz and 900 MHz Base Radios,
respectively.
Table 7-4
800 MHz Base Radio Receiver Board/BR Backplane Compatibility
CRF6010 3X Receiver
TRF6560 Receiver
New backplane 0183265X--
Compatible
Not compatible
Old backplane 0182416W--
Not compatible
Compatible
Table 7-5
900 MHz Base Radio Receiver Board/BR Backplane Compatibility
CRF6030A 3X Receiver
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
New backplane 0183265X--
Compatible
Old backplane 0182416W--
Not compatible
7-41
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356
Diversity Configuration
There is a new software parameter used for diversity purposes with the CLN1283
and CLN1356 3X Receivers. The parameter is the rx_fru_config parameter. The
diversity issues to consider are described in the following paragraph. This
parameter can be accessed through the MMI commands using the Motorola
password. ROMs prior to version R06.06.17 do not support the rx_fru_config
parameter. The ROM version in a base repeater can be checked using the MMI
command ver . If a repeater contains the CRF6010 or CRF6030 receiver, the BRC
board must be populated with a compatible version of ROM. Table 7-6 lists the
ROM compatibilities.
Table 7-6
Receiver ROM Compatibility
TRF6560
CRF6010/CRF6030
ROM version R06.03.40
Not compatible
Compatible
ROM version R06.06.09
Not compatible
Compatible
ROM version R06.06.17
Not compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
ROM versions newer than R06.06.17
NOTE
When replacing FRUs, ensure that the ROM version
on the BRC installed in the base radio is compatible
with the ROM version on the Receiver.
NOTE
If downloaded code is used, then the downloaded
code can be used to change the needed parameter (the
rx_fru_config parameter).
Diversity Uses and Cautions
The 3X receiver board can be used in one, two, or three branch diversity systems.
The number of active receivers is determined by the rx_fru_config parameter
stored on the Base Radio Control (BRC) board. The rx_fru_config parameter is
only valid, and must be set properly for, systems utilizing the CRF6010 or
CRF6030 3X Receiver board. The rx_fru_config parameter is ignored by Base
Radios that have ROM older than version R06.06.17 installed on the Base Radio
Controller board.
7-42
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356
To view the rx_fru_config parameter, use the MMI command
get rx_fru_config . The conÞguration of each repeater can be changed in the
Þeld to match the number of receivers connected to antennas. To change the
rx_fru_conÞg parameter, use the command set rx_fru_config yyy , where yyy is
the active receiver (yyy is 1 for one branch, 12 for two branch, and 123 for three
branch diversity. For the iDEN system to work optimally, the rx_fru_config
parameter must match the number of receivers connected to antennas.
CAUTION
There will be signiÞcant system degradation if the
rx_fru_config parameter is not properly set in
systems with the CLN1283 or CLN1356 3X receiver
kit.
Modifying Base Radios from Three Branch to Two
Branch Diversity
NOTE
This procedure is applicable only to Base Radios
equipped with the CRF6010 or CRF6030 3X Receiver
Board.
When modifying a three branch Base Radio to a two branch Base Radio, it is
important to observe all precautionary statements in the previous paragraph.
To modify a three branch Base Radio to a two branch Base Radio:
1.
Disconnect the RF cable from the RX3 connector on the Base Radio.
2.
Connect an SMA male load (Motorola part number 5882106P03) to the RX3
connector on the Base Radio.
The SMA male load is required to limit the amount of radiated emissions.
3.
68 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
Verify that the rx_fru_config parameter is set properly as described in the
Diversity Uses and Caution paragraph above.
7-43
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356
Modifying Base Radios from Two Branch to Three
Branch Diversity
1.
Remove the SMA male load from the RX3 connector of the Base Radio you
wish to convert from two branch diversity to three branch diversity.
2.
Connect the Receive Antenna #3 RF cable to the RX3 connector on the Base
Radio.
3.
Verify that the rx_fru_config parameter is set properly as described in the
Diversity Uses and Cautions paragraph.
Theory of Operation
The Receiver performs highly selective bandpass Þltering and dual down
conversion of the station receive RF signal. A custom Receiver IC outputs the
baseband information in a differential data format and sends it to the BRC.
Table 7-7 lists the Receiver circuitry and Figure 7-4 shows a functional block
diagram for the Receiver.
Table 7-7
Receiver Circuitry
Circuit
Description
Frequency
Synthesizer Circuitry
Consists of a phase-locked loop and VCO. It generates the 1st LO
injection signal for all three receivers.
Receiver Front-End
Circuitry
Provides Þltering, ampliÞcation, and the 1st down conversion of the
receive RF signal. Digital step attenuators at the 1st IF are included in
this block.
Custom Receiver IC
Circuitry
Consists of a custom IC to perform the 2nd down conversion, Þltering,
ampliÞcation, and conversion of the receive signal. This block outputs
the receive signal as differential data to the BRC.
Address Decode,
A/D Converter, &
Memory Circuitry
Performs address decoding for board and chip select signal, converts
analog status signals to digital format for use by the BRC. A memory
device holds module speciÞc information.
Local Power Supply
Regulation
Accepts +14.2 Vdc input from the backplane interconnect board and
generates two +10 Vdc, a +11.5 Vdc, and two +5 Vdc signals for the
receiver.
Frequency Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry
The synthesizer and VCO circuitry generate the RF signal used to produce the
1st LO injection signal for the Þrst mixer in all the Receiver front end circuits.
Functional operation of these circuits involves a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) and
VCO.
The PLL IC receives frequency selection data from the BRC module
microprocessor via the SPI bus. Once programmed, the PLL IC compares a
2.1 MHz reference signal from the BRC with a feedback sample of the VCO
output from its feedback buffer.
7-44
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356
Correction pulses are generated by the PLL IC, depending on whether the
feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2.1 MHz reference. The
width of these pulses is dependent on the amount of difference between the
2.1 MHz reference and the VCO feedback.
The up/down pulses are fed to a charge pump circuit that outputs a DC voltage
proportional to the pulse widths. This DC voltage is low-pass Þltered and fed to
the VCO circuit as the control voltage. The control voltage is between +2.5 Vdc
and +7.5 Vdc.
The DC control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to the VCO, which generates
the RF signal used to produce the 1st LO injection signal. The VCO responds to
the DC control voltage by generating the appropriate RF signal. This signal is fed
through a buffer to the 1st LO injection ampliÞer. A sample of this signal is
returned to the PLL IC through a buffer to close the VCO feedback loop.
Receiver Front End Circuitry
The station receive RF signal enters the Receiver through the RF-type connector
located on the back of the Receiver board. This signal is low-pass Þltered and
ampliÞed. The ampliÞed output is image Þltered before being input to the 1st
mixer. The signal mixes with the 1st LO injection signal to produce a 73.35 MHz
1st IF signal.
The 1st IF signal is sent through a 4-pole bandpass Þlter and fed to a buffer
ampliÞer. The buffer ampliÞer output signal is 4-pole bandpass Þltered again and
the resultant signal is then passed through a digital attenuator. This attenuation is
determined by the BRC. The resulting signal is then fed to the RF input of the
custom receive IC.
Custom Receiver IC Circuitry
The custom Receiver IC provides additional ampliÞcation, Þltering, and a second
down-conversion. The 2nd IF signal is converted to a digital signal and is output
via differential driver circuitry to the BRC. This data signal contains the necessary
I and Q information, AGC information, and other data transfer information
required by the BRC to process the receive signal.
The remainder of the custom Receiver IC circuitry consists of timing and tank
circuits to support the internal oscillator, 2nd LO synthesizer circuitry, and 2nd IF
circuitry.
A serial bus provides data communications between the custom Receiver IC and
the DSP Glue ASIC (DGA) located on the BRC. This bus enables the DGA to
control various current and gain settings, establish the data bus clock rate,
program the 2nd LO, and perform other control functions.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
7-45
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1283; 900 MHz 3X Receiver – CLN1356
Address Decode Circuitry
The address decode circuitry enables the BRC to use the SPI bus to select a speciÞc
device on a speciÞc Receiver for control or data communication purposes.
If the board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 through A5 as the Receiver
address, it enables the chip select circuitry. The chip select circuitry then decodes
address lines A0 and A1 to generate the chip select signals for the EEPROM, A/D
converter, and PLL IC.
Memory Circuitry
The memory circuitry consists of three EEPROMs located on the Receiver. The
BRC performs all memory read and write operations via the SPI bus. Information
stored in this memory device includes the kit number, revision number, module
speciÞc scaling and correction factors, and free form module information
(scratch pad).
A/D Converter Circuitry
Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the Receiver
board are fed to the A/D converter. These analog signals are converted to a
digital signal and are output to the BRC via the SPI lines upon request of the BRC.
Voltage Regulator Circuitry
The voltage regulator circuitry consists of two +10 Vdc, a +10.8 Vdc, and two
+5 Vdc regulators. The two +10 Vdc and the +10.8 Vdc regulators accept the
+14.2 Vdc input from the backplane interconnect board and generate the
operating voltages for the Receiver circuitry.
The +10 Vdc regulators each feed a +5 Vdc regulator, one of which outputs
Analog +5 Vdc, and the other Digital +5 Vdc operating voltages for use by the
custom Receiver IC.
A +5.1 Vdc operating voltage is also available from the backplane interconnect
board to supply +5.1 Vdc to the remainder of the Receiver circuitry.
7-46
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427
1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427
Overview
The Receiver module provides the receiver functions for the Repeater. It consists
of a receiver board, a slide-in module housing, and associated hardware.
The receiver module assembly interconnects with the backplane through a 96-pin
connector and a blindmate RF connector. Two captive panel fasteners located on
the front of the module hold it in the chassis.
Figure 7-2 shows a top view of the Receiver module with the module cover
removed.
Figure:7-2
Receiver (with top removed)
1.5GHZ-B853
Theory of Operation
The Receiver module performs highly selective bandpass Þltering and dual
down-conversion of the station receive RF signal. A custom receiver IC outputs
the baseband information in a differential data format and sends it to the Base
Radio Controller module (BRC).
Table 7-8 lists and describes the Receiver circuitry and Figure 7-5 shows the
functional block diagram.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
7-47
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427
Table 7-8
Receiver Circuitry and Functions
Receiver Circuit
This Circuit . . .
Frequency
Synthesizer
Circuitry
consists of a phase-locked loop and VCO. It generates the 1st LO
injection signal.
Receiver Front-End
Circuitry
provides Þltering, ampliÞcation, and the 1st down-conversion of
the receive RF signal. Digital step attenuators at the 1st IF are
included in this block.
Custom Receiver IC
Circuitry
consists of a custom IC to perform the 2nd down-conversion,
Þltering, ampliÞcation, and conversion of the receive signal. This
block outputs the receive signal as differential data to the BRC
module.
Address Decode,
A/D Converter, &
Memory Circuitry
performs address decoding for board and chip select signal,
converts analog status signals to digital format for use by the
BRC module. A memory device holds module speciÞc
information.
Local Power Supply
Regulation
accepts +14.2 Vdc input from the backplane interconnect board
and generates two +10 Vdc signals and two +5 Vdc signals for
the receiver module.
Frequency Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry
The synthesizer and VCO circuitry generate the RF signal used to produce the 1st
LO injection signal for the 1st mixer in the receiver front end circuitry. Functional
operation of these circuits involves a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) and VCO.
Phase-Locked Loop
The PLL IC receives frequency selection data from the BRC module
microprocessor via the SPI bus. Once programmed, the PLL IC compares a 2.1
MHz reference signal from the BRC with a feedback sample of the VCO output
from its feedback buffer.
Correction pulses are generated by the PLL IC, depending on whether the
feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2.1 MHz reference. The
width of these pulses is dependent on the amount of difference between the 2.1
MHz reference and the VCO feedback.
The up/down pulses are fed to a charge pump circuit that outputs a dc voltage
proportional to the pulse widths. This dc voltage is low-pass Þltered and fed to
the VCO circuit as the control voltage. The control voltage is between +2.5 Vdc
and +7.5 Vdc.
VCO
The dc control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to the VCO, which generates
the RF signal used to produce the 1st LO injection signal. The VCO responds to
the dc control voltage by generating the appropriate RF signal. A sample of this
signal is returned to the PLL IC through a buffer to close the VCO feedback loop.
Most of this signal is fed through a buffer to the doubler .
7-48
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427
The frequency doubler is used to double the frequency of the RF signal from the
VCO to produce the 1st LO injection signal. This frequency-doubled signal is sent
to the injection ampliÞer to provide the 1st LO injection signal to the mixer in the
receiver front end circuitry.
Receiver Front End Circuitry
The station receive RF signal enters the receiver module through the RF-type
connector located on the receiver board. This signal is low-pass Þltered. It is then
sent to the preselector, and ampliÞed. The ampliÞed output is image Þltered
before being input to the 1st mixer. The signal mixes with the 1st LO injection
signal to produce a 73.35 MHz 1st IF signal.
The 1st IF signal is sent through a 4-pole bandpass Þlter and fed to a buffer
ampliÞer. The signal is 4-pole bandpass Þltered again. The resultant signal passes
through a digital attenuator. This attenuation is determined by the BRC module.
The signal is then fed to the RF input of the custom receive IC.
Custom Receiver IC Circuitry
The custom receiver IC provides additional ampliÞcation, Þltering, and a second
down-conversion. The 2nd IF signal is converted to a digital signal and is output
via differential driver circuitry to the BRC. This data signal contains the necessary
I and Q information, AGC information, and other data transfer information
required by the BRC to process the receive signal.
The remainder of the custom receiver IC circuitry consists of timing and tank
circuits to support the internal oscillator, 2nd LO synthesizer circuitry, and 2nd IF
circuitry.
A serial bus provides data communications between the custom receiver IC and
the DSP Glue ASIC (DGA) located on the BRC. This bus enables the DGA to
control various current and gain settings, establish the data bus clock rate,
program the 2nd LO, and perform other control functions.
Address Decode, Memory, and A/D Converter Circuitry
The Address Decode, Memory and A/D Converter circuitry performs address
decoding for board and chip select signals, converts analog status signals to
digital format, and the memory holds module speciÞc information.
Address Decode Circuitry
The address decode circuitry enables the BRC module to use the address bus. The
BRC can select a speciÞc device on a speciÞc station module via the SPI bus for
control or data communication purposes.
If the board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 through A5 as the receiver
module address, it enables the chip select circuitry. The chip select circuitry then
decodes address lines A0 and A1 to generate the chip select signals for the
EEPROM, A/D converter, and PLL IC.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
7-49
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
1500 MHz Receiver – TLN3427
Memory Circuitry
The memory circuitry consists of an EEPROM located on the receiver module.
The BRC module performs all memory read and write operations via the SPI bus.
Information stored in this memory device includes the kit number, revision
number, module speciÞc scaling and correction factors, and free form module
information (scratch pad).
A/D Converter Circuitry
Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the receiver
board are fed to the A/D converter. These analog signals are converted to a digital
signal and are output to the BRC via the SPI lines upon request of the BRC
module.
Voltage Regulator Circuitry
The voltage regulator circuitry consists of two +10 Vdc and two +5 Vdc
regulators. The +10 Vdc regulators accept the +14.2 Vdc input from the backplane
interconnect board. Both regulators generate a +10 Vdc operating voltage for the
receiver board circuitry.
One of the +10 Vdc regulators feed two +5 Vdc regulators, which outputs an
Analog +5 Vdc and Digital +5 Vdc operating voltages for use by the custom
receiver IC.
A +5.1 Vdc operating voltage is also available from the backplane interconnect
board to supply +5.1 Vdc to the remainder of the receiver board circuitry.
7-50
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;
800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;
Overview
The QUAD receiver provides receiver functions for the QUAD Channel Base
Radio. The QUAD receiver consists of a receiver board, a slide-in housing, and
associated hardware. A a single module of the QUAD receiver incorporates one
to three diversity branches. Figure 7-3 shows a top view of the Receiver with the
cover removed.
TH
Figure:7-3
MU
BE
CH
3X Receiver (with cover removed)
Diversity Uses and Cautions
The 3X receiver board can be used in one, two, or three-branch diversity systems.
The rx_fru_config parameter determines the number of active receivers. To
view the rx_fru_config parameter, use the MMI command. (See software
commands.) Each repeaterÕs conÞguration can be changed in the Þeld to match
the number of receivers connected to antennas. To change the rx_fru_conÞg
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
7-51
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;
parameter, use the command (reference software commands). In this command,
yyy is the active receiver. (Note: yyy is 1 for one branch, 12 for two branch, and
123 for three branch diversity.) For the iDEN system to work optimally, the
rx_fru_config parameter must match the number of receivers connected to
antennas.
CAUTION
Improperly setting the rx_fru_config parameter will
cause serious system degradation.
Modifying Base Radios from Three Branch to Two
Branch Diversity
When modifying a three-branch Base Radio to a two-branch Base Radio,
observing all precautionary statements in the previous paragraph is important.
To modify a three-branch Base Radio to a two-branch Base Radio:
1.
Disconnect the RF cable from the RX3 connector on the Base Radio.
2.
Connect an SMA male load (Motorola part number 5882106P03) to the RX3
connector on the Base Radio.
The SMA male load is required to limit the amount of radiated emissions.
3.
7-52
Verify that the rx_fru_config parameter is set properly, according to the
Diversity Uses and Caution paragraph above.
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;
Modifying Base Radios from Two Branch to Three
Branch Diversity
1.
Remove the SMA male load from the RX3 connector of the Base Radio that
you wish to convert from two-branch diversity to three-branch diversity.
2.
Connect the Receive Antenna #3 RF cable to the RX3 connector on the Base
Radio.
3.
Verify that the rx_fru_config parameter is set properly, according to the
Diversity Uses and Cautions paragraph.
Theory of Operation
The Receiver performs highly selective bandpass Þltering and dual down
conversion of the station receive RF signal. A custom Receiver IC outputs the
baseband information in a differential data format and sends it to the BRC.
Table 7-7 lists the Receiver circuitry. Figure 7-6 shows a functional block diagram
for the Receiver.
Table 7-9
Receiver Circuitry
Circuit
Description
Frequency
Synthesizer Circuitry
Consists of a phase-locked loop and VCO. It generates the 1st LO
injection signal for all three receivers.
Receiver Front-End
Circuitry
Provides Þltering, ampliÞcation, and the 1st down conversion of the
receive RF signal. This block includes digital step attenuators at the 1st
IF.
Custom Receiver IC
Circuitry
Consists of a custom IC to perform the 2nd down conversion, Þltering,
ampliÞcation, and conversion of the receive signal. This block outputs
the receive signal as differential data to the BRC.
Address Decode,
A/D Converter, &
Memory Circuitry
Performs address decoding for board and chip-select signals. Converts
analog status signals to digital format for use by the BRC. A memory
device holds module-speciÞc information.
Local Power Supply
Regulation
Accepts +14.2 Vdc input from the backplane interconnect board. Also
generates two +10 Vdc, a +11.5 Vdc, and two +5 Vdc signals for the
receiver.
Frequency Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry
The synthesizer and VCO circuitry generate the RF signal used to produce the
1st LO injection signal for the Þrst mixer in all the Receiver front end circuits.
Functional operation of these circuits involves a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) and
VCO.
The PLL IC receives frequency selection data from the BRC module
microprocessor via the SPI bus. Once programmed, the PLL IC compares a
2.1 MHz reference signal from the BRC with a feedback sample of the VCO
output from its feedback buffer.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
7-53
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;
The PLL ICC generates correction pulses, depending on whether the feedback
signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2.1 MHz reference. The width of
these pulses depends on the amount of difference between the 2.1 MHz reference
and the VCO feedback.
The up/down pulses enter a charge pump circuit. The charge pump outputs a DC
voltage proportional to the pulse widths. After low-pass Þltering, this DC voltage
enters the VCO circuit as the control voltage. The control voltage measures
between +2.5 Vdc and +7.5 Vdc.
The DC control voltage from the synthesizer is enters the VCO. The VCO
generates the RF signal that the circuit uses to produce the 1st LO injection signal.
The VCO responds to the DC control voltage by generating the appropriate RF
signal. This signal passes through a buffer to the 1st LO injection ampliÞer. A
sample of this signal returns to the PLL IC through a buffer to close the VCO
feedback loop.
Receiver Front End Circuitry
The station receive RF signal enters the Receiver through the RF-type connector
on the back of the Receiver board. The circuit low-pass Þlters and ampliÞes this
signal. The ampliÞed output passes through an image Þlters before entering the
1st mixer. The signal mixes with the 1st LO injection signal to produce a 73.35
MHz 1st IF signal.
The 1st IF signal passes through a four-pole, bandpass Þlter and enters a buffer
ampliÞer. The buffer ampliÞer output signal again undergoes four-pole,
bandpass Þltering. The resultant signal then passes through a digital attenuator.
The BRC determines the amount of attenuation. The resulting signal then enters
the RF input of the custom Receiver IC.
Custom Receiver IC Circuitry
The custom Receiver IC provides additional ampliÞcation, Þltering, and a second
down-conversion. The IC converts the 2nd IF signal to a digital signal. The digital
signal exits the receiver IC via differential driver circuitry, and passes to the BRC.
This data signal contains I and Q information, AGC information, and other data
transfer information. The BRC uses this information to facilitate processing of the
receive signal.
The remainder of the custom Receiver IC circuitry consists of timing and tank
circuits. These circuits support the internal oscillator, 2nd LO synthesizer, and 2nd
IF circuitry.
A serial bus provides data communications between the custom Receiver IC and
the DSP Glue ASIC (DGA). These circuits are on the BRC. The serial bus enables
the DGA to perform several control functions...
7-54
❐
control various current and gain settings
❐
establish the data bus clock rate
❐
program the 2nd LO
❐
perform other control functions
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
800 MHz QUAD Channel Receiver – CLN1283;
Address Decode Circuitry
Address decode circuitry enables the BRC to use the SPI bus to select a speciÞc
device on a speciÞc Receiver for control or data communication purposes.
If board-select circuitry decodes address lines A2 through A5 as the Receiver
address, it enables the chip select circuitry. The chip select circuitry then decodes
address lines A0 and A1. The decoding process generates the chip select signals
for the EEPROM, A/D converter, and PLL IC.
Memory Circuitry
The memory circuitry consists of three EEPROMs located on the Receiver. The
BRC performs memory read and write operations via the SPI bus. Information
stored in this memory device includes...
❐
the kit number
❐
revision number
❐
module speciÞc scaling and correction factors
❐
free form module information (scratch pad)
A/D Converter Circuitry
Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the Receiver
board pass through the A/D converter. These analog signals become a digital
signal. Upon request of the BRC, this signal travels to the BRC via the SPI lines.
Voltage Regulator Circuitry
The voltage regulator circuitry consists of two +10 Vdc, a +10.8 Vdc, and two
+5 Vdc regulators. The two +10 Vdc and the +10.8 Vdc regulators accept the
+14.2 Vdc input from the backplane interconnect board. These regulators produce
operating voltages for the Receiver circuitry.
The +10 Vdc regulators each feed a +5 Vdc regulator. One of these regulators
outputs Analog +5 Vdc. The other regulator outputs Digital +5 Vdc operating
voltages for use by the custom Receiver IC.
The backplane interconnect board also produces a +5.1 Vdc operating voltage.
This voltage powers the remainder of the Receiver circuitry.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
7-55
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radio
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
7-56
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Receiver
3X Receiver
Functional Block Diagram
RECEIVER #3 FRONT END CIRCUITRY
RECEIVER #2 FRONT END CIRCUITRY
RECEIVER #1 FRONT END CIRCUITRY
1ST
MIXER
RECEIVE RF
FROM RX ANTENNA
(MULTICOUPLER)
LO-PASS
FILTER
HI-PASS
FILTER
4-POLE
BANDPASS
FILTER
PREAMPLIFIER
CIRCUITRY
4-POLE
BANDPASS
FILTER
SMA-TYPE
CONNECTOR
DIGITAL
ATTENUATOR
CIRCUITRY
AGC
FROM CONTROL
MODULE
3 WAY
SPLITTER
TO RECEIVER #2 MIXER
TO RECEIVER #3 MIXER
REGULATORY
CIRCUITRY
ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/D
CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
ABACUS #3
MEMORY #3
+10 V
REGULATOR
MEMORY #2
+5 V
REGULATOR
DIGITAL
+5 V
SOURCE
CUSTOM RECEIVER
IC CIRCUITRY
(ABACUS #1 )
CHIP
SELECT
MEMORY #1
CHIP SELECT
DECODE CIRCUITRY
+10 V
REGULATOR
CHIP
SELECT
ADDRESS BUS
FROM CONTROL
MODULE
#3 A/D
CONVERTER
RECEIVER SELECT
DECODE CIRCUITRY
VARIOUS
SIGNALS
TO MONITOR
ABACUS #2
DIFFERENTIAL
DATA
TO CONTROL
MODULE
+10 V
SOURCE
73.35 MHZ
1ST IF
+14.2 V
FROM
BACKPLANE
#2 A/D
CONVERTER
+10 V
REGULATOR
+5 V
REGULATOR
ANALOG
+5 V
SOURCE
DRIVER
CIRCUITRY
#1 A/D
CONVERTER
SPI BUS
TO/FROM CONTROL
MODULE
SECOND
+10 V
SOURCE
SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)
SYNTHESIZER
CIRCUITRY
VCO
CIRCUITRY
CHIP
SELECT
2.1 MHZ REF
FROM CONTROL
MODULE
BUFFER
RIN
PHASE
LOCKED
LOOP
IC
INJECTION
AMPLIFIER
CUSTOM
RECEIVER
IC
+10 V
SUPER
FILTER
CHARGE
PUMP
LO-PASS
LOOP
FILTER
CONTROL
VOLTAGE
(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)
450 KHZ
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
SERIAL BUS
TO/FROM CONTROL
MODULE
14.4 MHZ
TIMING
CIRCUITRY
VCO
OSCILLATOR
2ND LO
VCO
BUFFER
AMP
2.1 MHZ REF
(NOTE)
FIN
VCO
FEEDBACK
BUFFER
VCO FEEDBACK
VCO
FEEDBACK
2.1 MHZ REFERENCE
EBTS293
120597JNM
NOTE: 14.4 MHz TIMING CIRCUITRY AND 2ND LO VCO PRESENT ONLY ON ABACUS #2.
FUNCTIONS ARE SHARED FOR ALL THREE ABACUS SECTIONS.
Figure:7-4
6 8 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
4/1/2000
3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram
7-57
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Receiver
Receiver
Functional Block Diagram
Model TLN3427
RECEIVER FRONT END CIRCUITRY
1ST
MIXER
(CR2070)
LOW-PASS
FILTER
(L2000, C2000,
C2001, C2002)
RECEIVE RF
FROM RX ANTENNA
(MULTICOUPLER)
PRESELECTOR
FILTER
(FL2000)
PREAMPLIFIER
CIRCUITRY
(Q2030, Q2031)
BUFFER
AMP
(Q2100)
IMAGE
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
(FL2070)
1ST LO
INJ AMP
CIRCUITRY
(Q2302, Q2303,
FL2300)
ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/D
CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
CHIP SELECT
DECODE CIRCUITRY
(U2804)
CHIP SELECT
ADDRESS BUS
FROM BRC
MODULE
REGULATORY
CIRCUITRY
EEPROM
MEMORY
(U2601)
VARIOUS
SIGNALS
TO MONITOR
+5 V
REGULATOR
(U2700)
LINE
DRIVER
(U2805)
DIGITAL
ATTENUATOR
CIRCUITRY
(U2100)
BUFFER
AMP
(Q2300)
DOUBLER
(Q2301)
DIGITAL
+5 V
SOURCE
CUSTOM
RECEIVER IC
CIRCUITRY
DIFFERENTIAL
DATA (DSP BUS)
TO BRC
MODULE
+10 V
SOURCE
+14.2 V
FROM
BACKPLANE
A/D
CONVERTER
(U2600)
AGC
FROM BRC
MODULE
73.35 MHZ
1ST IF
+10 V
REGULATOR
(U2703)
CHIP SELECT
BOARD SELECT
DECODE CIRCUITRY
(U2804)
4-POLE
BANDPASS
FILTER
(Y2101)
4-POLE
BANDPASS
FILTER
(Y2100)
+10 V
REGULATOR
(U2702)
+5 V
REGULATOR
(U2701)
DRIVER
CIRCUITRY
(U2501)
ANALOG
+5 V
SOURCE
450 KHZ
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
VCO
CIRCUITRY
CHIP
SELECT
REFERENCE
BUFFER
(Q2402)
14.4 MHZ
TIMING
CIRCUITRY
+10 V
SYNTHESIZER
CIRCUITRY
2.1 MHZ REF
FROM BRC
MODULE
CUSTOM
RECEIVER IC
(U2500)
SECOND
+10 V
SOURCE
SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)
SPI BUS
TO/FROM BRC
MODULE
RIN
PHASE
LOCKED
LOOP IC
(U2401)
SUPER
FILTER
(Q2280)
CHARGE PUMP
(Q2405, Q2406,
Q2407, Q2408,
Q2409)
LOW-PASS
LOOP
FILTER
(U2403)
CONTROL
VOLTAGE
(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)
SERIAL BUS
TO/FROM BRC
MODULE
2ND LO
TANK
CIRCUITRY
OSCILLATOR
(U2200)
2.1 MHZ REF
FIN
VCO
FEEDBACK
BUFFER
(Q2401)
VCO FEEDBACK
VCO
FEEDBACK
2.1 MHZ REFERENCE
Figure:7-5
7-58
1500 MHz Receiver Functional Block Diagram
68P 81095E 02-D
4/ 1/ 2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Receiver
QUAD Receiver
Functional Block Diagram
RECEIVER #3 FRONT END CIRCUITRY
RECEIVER #2 FRONT END CIRCUITRY
RECEIVER #1 FRONT END CIRCUITRY
1ST
MIXER
RECEIVE RF
FROM RX ANTENNA
(MULTICOUPLER)
LO-PASS
FILTER
HI-PASS
FILTER
CH
4-POLE
BANDPASS
FILTER
PREAMPLIFIER
CIRCUITRY
SMA-TYPE
CONNECTOR
DIGITAL
ATTENUATOR
CIRCUITRY
AGC
FROM CONTROL
MODULE
3 WAY
SPLITTER
TO RECEIVER #2 MIXER
BE
4-POLE
BANDPASS
FILTER
TO RECEIVER #3 MIXER
REGULATORY
CIRCUITRY
ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/D
CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
MEMORY #3
+10 V
REGULATOR
MEMORY #2
CHIP
SELECT
MEMORY #1
CHIP SELECT
DECODE CIRCUITRY
#3 A/D
CONVERTER
RECEIVER SELECT
DECODE CIRCUITRY
VARIOUS
SIGNALS
TO MONITOR
#2 A/D
CONVERTER
#1 A/D
CONVERTER
SPI BUS
TO/FROM CONTROL
MODULE
SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA)
SYNTHESIZER
CIRCUITRY
CHIP
SELECT
2.1 MHZ REF
FROM CONTROL
MODULE
BUFFER
RIN
PHASE
LOCKED
LOOP
IC
TH
CHARGE
PUMP
LO-PASS
LOOP
FILTER
ABACUS #2
CUSTOM RECEIVER
IC CIRCUITRY
(ABACUS #1 )
+10 V
REGULATOR
CHIP
SELECT
ADDRESS BUS
FROM CONTROL
MODULE
+5 V
REGULATOR
ABACUS #3
DIGITAL
+5 V
SOURCE
DIFFERENTIAL
DATA
TO CONTROL
MODULE
+10 V
SOURCE
73.35 MHZ
1ST IF
+14.2 V
FROM
BACKPLANE
+10 V
REGULATOR
VCO
CIRCUITRY
+5 V
REGULATOR
SECOND
+10 V
SOURCE
ANALOG
+5 V
SOURCE
INJECTION
AMPLIFIER
450 KHZ
FILTER
CIRCUITRY
CUSTOM
RECEIVER
IC
+10 V
SUPER
FILTER
CONTROL
VOLTAGE
(+2.5 TO +7.5 VDC)
DRIVER
CIRCUITRY
SERIAL BUS
TO/FROM CONTROL
MODULE
14.4 MHZ
TIMING
CIRCUITRY
VCO
OSCILLATOR
2ND LO
VCO
BUFFER
AMP
2.1 MHZ REF
(NOTE)
FIN
VCO
FEEDBACK
BUFFER
VCO FEEDBACK
VCO
FEEDBACK
2.1 MHZ REFERENCE
EBTS293
120597JNM
NOTE: 14.4 MHz TIMING CIRCUITRY AND 2ND LO VCO PRESENT ONLY ON ABACUS #2.
FUNCTIONS ARE SHARED FOR ALL THREE ABACUS SECTIONS.
Figure:7-6
6 8 P 8 1 0 95E02- D
4/1/2000
3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram
7-59
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Receiver
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
7-60
68P 81095E 02-D
4/ 1/ 2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
8 Troubleshooting
Single Channel Base
Radios
Overview
This chapter isolates single channel Base Radio failures to the FRU level. The
chapter contains procedures for:
chapter contains procedures for:
❐
Troubleshooting
❐
VeriÞcation
❐
Station Operation
The Base Radio maintenance philosophy is repair by replacing defective FRUs
with new FRUs. This maintenance method limits down-time, and quickly
restores the Base Radio to normal operation.
Two Base Radio troubleshooting procedures appear here. Each procedure quickly
identifies faulty FRUs.
Ship defective FRUs to a Motorola repair depot for repair.
Recommended Test Equipment
Table 8-1 lists recommended test equipment for performing Base Radio
troubleshooting and veriÞcation procedures.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-1
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Table 8-1
Recommended Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Model Number
Use
Communications Analyzer
R2660 w/iDEN option
Used for checking receive and
transmit operation (iDEN
signaling capability) and station
alignment
Dummy Load (50 Ω, 150 W)
none
Used to terminate output
Service Computer
IBM or clone, 80286 or
better
Local service terminal
Portable Rubidium
Frequency Standard
Ball Efratom
Frequency standard for R2660,
netting TFR
Power Meter
none
Used to measure reßected and
forward power
RF Attenuator, 250 W, 10 dB
Motorola 0180301E72
Protection for R2660
Communication
Procomm Plus
Local service computer
File Compression
PKZip
Compress/Decompress data
Software:
8-2
68P81095E02- D 4/1/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Troubleshooting Procedures
Many of the troubleshooting and station operation procedures require
Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands. These commands are used to
communicate station level commands to the Base Radio via the RS-232
communications port located on the front of the BRC.
Routine Checkout
Procedure 1 is a quick, non-intrusive test performed during a routine site visit.
Use this procedure to verify proper station operation without taking the station
out of service. Figure 8-1 shows the Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart.
ROUTINE
SITE VISIT
PROCEDURE 1
OBSERVE LED
INDICATORS
Refer to
Controls and Indicators
for LED Definitions
Module Suspected
of Being Faulty?
Yes
Go to Troubleshooting
Procedure 2 Flow Chart
No
CHECK CURRENT
ALARM STATUS
Use MMI command
get alarms
to check alarm status
Module Suspected
of Being Faulty?
Yes
Go to Troubleshooting
Procedure 2 Flow Chart
No
DONE
EBTS021
071895JNM
Figure:8-1
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart
8-3
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Reported/Suspected Problem
Use Procedure 2 to troubleshoot reported or suspected equipment malfunctions.
Perform this procedure with equipment in service (non-intrusive) and with
equipment taken temporarily out of service (intrusive).
Figure 8-2 shows the Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart.
PROBLEM
REPORTED OR SUSPECTED
PROCEDURE 2
OBSERVE LED
INDICATORS
Refer to
Controls and Indicators
for LED Definitions
Module Suspected
of Being Faulty?
Yes
Go to Module Replacement
Procedures Section
No
CHECK CURRENT
ALARM STATUS
Use MMI command
get alarms
to check alarm status
Module Suspected
of Being Faulty?
Yes
Go to Module Replacement
Procedures Section
No
PERFORM
VERIFICATION TESTS
Use MMI commands to
perform tests as specified in
station verification procedure.
Module Suspected
of Being Faulty?
Yes
Go to Module Replacement
Procedures Section
No
DONE
Clear Problem Report
EBTS022
071895JNM
Figure:8-2
8-4
Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU
Replacement Procedures
Replace suspected station modules with known non-defective modules to restore
the station to proper operation. The following procedures provide FRU
replacement instructions and post-replacement adjustments and/or
veriÞcation instructions.
Base Radio Replacement Procedure
NOTE
The Base Radio removal and installation procedures
are included for reference or buildout purposes. Field
maintenance of Base Radios typically consists of
replacement of FRUs within the Base Radio. Perform
Base Radio FRU replacement in accordance with ÒBase
Radio FRU Replacement ProcedureÓ below.
Perform Base Radio (BR) replacement as described in the following paragraphs.
Removal
Remove BR from Equipment Cabinet as follows:
1.
Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply ON/OFF
switch to the OFF position.
2.
Tag and disconnect the cabling from the BR rear panel connectors.
3.
Remove the four M6 TORX screws which secure the BR front panel to the
Equipment Cabinet mounting rails.
WARNING
BR WEIGHT EXCEEDS 60 LBS (27 KG). USE
TWO-PERSON LIFT WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING
BR FROM EQUIPMENT CABINET. MAKE CERTAIN BR IS
FULLY SUPPORTED WHEN BR IS FREE FROM
MOUNTING RAILS.
4.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
While supporting the BR, carefully remove the BR from the Equipment
Cabinet by sliding the BR from the front of cabinet.
8-5
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures
Installation
Install BR in Equipment Cabinet as follows:
1.
If adding a BR, install side rails in the appropriate BR mounting position in
the rack.
2.
While supporting the BR, carefully lift and slide the BR in the Equipment
Cabinet mounting position.
3.
Secure the BR to the Equipment Cabinet mounting rails using four M6
TORX screws. Tighten the screws to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
4.
Connect the cabling to the BR rear panel connectors as tagged during the BR
removal. If adding a BR, perform the required cabling in accordance with
the Cabling Information subsection of the RFDS section applicable to the
system.
5.
Perform BR activation in accordance with Station VeriÞcation Procedures
below.
Anti-Static Precautions
CAUTION
The Base Radio contains static-sensitive devices.
when replacing Base Radio FRUs, always wear a
grounded wrist strap and observe proper anti-static
procedures to prevent electrostatic discharge damage
to Base Radio modules.
Motorola publication 68P81106E84 provides complete static protection
information. This publication is available through Motorola National Parts.
Observe the following additional precautions:
❐
Wear a wrist strap (Motorola Part No. 4280385A59 or equivalent) at all times
when servicing the Base Radio to minimize static build-up.
❐
A grounding clip is provided with each EBTS cabinet. If not available, use
another appropriate grounding point.
❐
DO NOT insert or remove modules with power applied to the Base Radio.
ALWAYS turn the power OFF using the Power Supply rocker switch on the
front of the Power Supply module.
❐
Keep spare modules in factory packaging for transporting. When shipping
modules, always pack in original packaging.
FRU Replacement Procedure
Perform the following steps to replace any of the Base Radio FRUs:
8-6
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures
NOTE
When servicing Base Radios (BRs), in situations where
the Control Board or the entire BR is replaced, the
integrated Site Controller (iSC) will automatically
reboot the serviced BR given that the BR has been
off-line for a period not less than that stipulated by the
ÒReplacement BRC Accept TimerÓ (default is 3
minutes). If the BR is turned on prior to the expiration
of the ÒReplacement BRC Accept TimerÓ, power the
BR back down and wait the minimum timer length
before turning the BR back on.
1.
Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker
switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0)
position.
2.
Loosen the front panel fasteners. These are located on each side of the
module being replaced.
3.
Pull out the module.
4.
Insert the non-defective replacement module by aligning the module side
rails with the appropriate rail guides inside the Base Radio chassis.
5.
Gently push the replacement module completely into the Base Radio chassis
assembly using the module handle(s).
CAUTION
DO NOT slam or force the module into the chassis
assembly. This will damage the connectors
or backplane.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
6.
Secure the replacement module by tightening the front panel fasteners to the
speciÞed torque of 5 in-lbs.
7.
Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the ON position.
8.
Perform the Station VeriÞcation Procedure provided below.
8-7
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures
Power Amplifier (PA) Fan FRU Replacement
Perform the following steps to replace the Power AmpliÞer (PA) fans.
1.
Remove the Power AmpliÞer from the Base Radio per FRU Replacement
Procedure.
2.
Disconnect fan power cable from PA housing.
3.
Remove front panel from fan assembly.
4.
Remove fan assembly from PA chassis.
NOTE
Reverse above procedure to install new fan kit.
8-8
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
Station Verification Procedures
Perform the Station VeriÞcation Procedures whenever you replace a FRU. The
procedures verify transmit and receive operations. Each procedure also contains
the equipment set-up.
Replacement FRU Verification
All module speciÞc information is programmed in the factory prior to shipment.
Base Radio speciÞc information (e.g., receive and transmit frequencies) is
downloaded to the Base Radio from the network/site controller.
Replacement FRU alignment is not required for the Base Radio.
Base Repeater FRU Hardware Revision Verification
NOTE
The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be
out of service. Unless the Base Radio is currently out
of service, Motorola recommends performing this
procedure during off-peak hours. This minimizes or
eliminates disruption of service to system users.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
1.
Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.
2.
Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port, located on the
front panel of the BRC.
3.
Using the Þeld password, login to the BR.
8-9
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
4.
Collect revision numbers from the station by typing the
following commands:
BRC>dekey
BRC>test_mode
BRC>get brc_rev_no
BRC>get rx1_rev_no
BRC>get rx2_rev_no
BRC>get rx3_rev_no
BRC>get pa_rev_no
BRC>get ex_rev_no
(if BR is 3 branch)
BRC>
5.
If all modules return revision numbers of the format ÒRxx.xx.xxÓ, then all
revision numbers are present and no further action is required. Log out and
repeat steps 1 through 4 for each additional BR.
If revision numbers were returned as blank or not in the format ÒRxx.xx.xxÓ,
contact your local Motorola representative or Technical Support.
6.
When all BRs have been checked, log out.
Transmitter Verification
The transmitter veriÞcation procedure veriÞes the transmitter operation and the
integrity of the transmit path. This veriÞcation procedure is recommended after
replacing an Exciter, Power AmpliÞer, BRC, or Power Supply module.
NOTE
The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be
out of service. Unless the Base Radio is currently out
of service, Motorola recommends performing this
procedure during off-peak hours. This minimizes or
eliminates disruption of service to system users.
Equipment Setup
To set up the equipment, use the following procedure:
8-10
1.
Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker
switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0)
position.
2.
Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.
68P81095E02- D 4/1/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
3.
Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port located on the
front panel of the BRC.
4.
Disconnect the existing cable from the connector labeled PA OUT.
This connector is located on the backplane of the Base Radio.
5.
Connect a test cable to the PA OUT connector.
6.
Connect a 10 dB attenuator on the other end of the test cable.
7.
From the attenuator, connect a cable to the RF IN/OUT connector on the
R2660 Communications Analyzer.
8.
Remove power from the R2660 and connect the Rubidium Frequency
Standard 10MHZ OUTPUT to a 10 dB attenuator.
9.
Connect the other end of the 10 dB attenuator to the 10MHZ REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR IN/OUT connector on the R2660.
NOTE
Refer to the equipment manual provided with the
R2660 for further information regarding mode
conÞguration of the unit (Motorola Part
No. 68P80386B72).
10.
Set the R2660 to the EXT REF mode.
11.
Apply power to the R2660.
12.
Set the R2660 to the SPECTRUM ANALYZER mode with the center
frequency set to the transmit frequency of the Base Radio under test.
13.
Perform the appropriate transmitter veriÞcation procedure below for the
particular Power AmpliÞer used in the Base Radio.
Transmitter Verification Procedure
(40W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier – TLF2020)
This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of
the transmit path for 800 MHz Base Radios using a 40 Watt Power AmpliÞer.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-11
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
1.
Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the 1 position.
The following message displays on the service computer during power-up.
Base Radio
fi r mwa re rev i s i on R X X .X X .X X
Copyright  1998
Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved.
U n a u th o r i ze d a ccess prohi bi ted
E n te r l o g i n p a s sword:
2.
Enter the proper password. After entering the correct password, the BRC>
prompt is displayed on the service computer.
The default password is motorola
NOTE
Motorola recommends that you change the default
password once proper operation of the equipment is
veriÞed.
3.
At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey
This command veriÞes that there is no RF power being transmitted.
BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED
CAUTION
The following command keys the transmitter. Make
sure that transmission only occurs on licensed
frequencies or into a RF load.
8-12
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
4.
At the BRC> prompt, type: set tx_power 40
This command sets the transmitter output to 40 Watts.
B RC > set tx_power 40
s e tti ng transmi tter power to 40 watts
T X LIN ATTE N UATION : 5.000000
TAR GE T P OW E R : 40.00 watts [46.02 dB m]
AC TUA L P OW E R : 37.77 watts [45.07 dB m]
P OW E R W IN D OW : 38.20-> 41.89 watts [45.82 -> 46.22 dBm ]
T X LIN LE V E L R E GIS TE R R E D U C E D 59 S TE P S [-2.30 d B] .
T X LIN LE V E L: 0x6f
c o mpl eted successful l y
After keying the Base Radio, verify the forward and reßected powers of the
station along with the station VSWR with the parameters listed in Table 8-2.
Table 8-2
40W, 800 MHz PA Transmitter Parameters
Parameter
5.
Value or Range
Forward Power
Greater than 38.0 Watts
Reßected Power
Less than 4.0 Watts
VSWR
Less than 2:1
At the BRC> prompt, type: get fwd_pwr
This command returns the current value of forward power from the RF
Power AmpliÞer.
B RC > g et fwd_pwr
F ORWA R D P OW E R i s 39.13 watts [45.92 dB m]
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-13
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
6.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get ref_pwr
This command returns the current value of reßected power from the RF
Power AmpliÞer.
B R C > g e t r e f_ pwr
R EF L E C T E D P OW E R i s 0.27 watts [24.28 dB m]
7.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get vswr
This command calculates the current Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR)
from the RF Power AmpliÞer.
BRC> get vswr
VSWR is 1.17:1
8.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get alarms
This command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.
BRC> get alarms
NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED
NOTE
If the get alarms command displays alarms, refer to
the System Troubleshooting section of this manual for
corrective actions.
9.
View the spectrum of the transmitted signal on the R2660 Communications
Analyzer in the Spectrum Analyzer mode. Figure 8-3 shows a sample of the
spectrum.
10.
At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey
This command stops all transmitter activity.
BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED
8-14
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
EBTS071
032394JNM
Figure:8-3
Transmitted Signal Spectrum (800 MHz BR)
Transmitter Verification Procedure
(70W, 800 MHz Power Amplifiers – CTF1040)
This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of
the transmit path for 800 MHz Base Radios using a 70 Watt Power AmpliÞer.
1.
Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the 1 position.
The following message displays on the service computer during power-up.
B a se R adi o
fi r mware revi si on R X X .X X .X X
Copyright  1998
Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved.
U n author i zed access prohi bi ted
E n ter l ogi n password:
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-15
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
2.
Enter the proper password. After entering the correct password, the BRC>
prompt is displayed on the service computer.
The default password is motorola
NOTE
Motorola recommends that you change the default
password once proper operation of the equipment is
veriÞed.
3.
At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey
This command veriÞes that there is no RF power being transmitted.
BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED
CAUTION
The following command keys the transmitter. Make
sure that transmission only occurs on licensed
frequencies or into an RF load.
8-16
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
4.
At the BRC> prompt, type: set tx_power 70
This command sets the transmitter output to 70 Watts.
B RC > set tx_power 70
s e tti ng transmi tter power to 70 watts
T X LIN ATTE N UATION : 5.000000
TAR GE T P OW E R : 70.00 watts [48.45 dB m]
AC TUA L P OW E R : 56.70 watts [47.54 dB m]
P OW E R W IN D OW : 66.85 -> 73.30 watts [48.25 -> 48.65 dBm ]
T X LIN LE V E L R E GIS TE R R E D U C E D 85 S TE P S [-3.32 d B] .
T X LIN LE V E L: 0x55
c o mpl eted successful l y
After keying the Base Radio, verify the forward and reßected powers of the
station along with the station VSWR with the parameters listed in Table 8-3.
Table 8-3
70W, 800 MHz PA Transmitter Parameters
Parameter
5.
Value or Range
Forward Power
Greater than 66.5 Watts
Reßected Power
Less than 7.0 Watts
VSWR
Less than 2:1
At the BRC> prompt, type: get fwd_pwr
This command returns the current value of forward power from the RF
Power AmpliÞer.
B RC > g et fwd_pwr
F ORWA R D P OW E R i s 68.55 watts [48.36 dB m]
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-17
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
6.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get ref_pwr
This command returns the current value of reßected power from the RF
Power AmpliÞer.
B R C > g e t r e f_ pwr
R EF L E C T E D P OW E R i s 2.10 watts [33.22 dB m]
7.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get vswr
This command calculates the current Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR)
from the RF Power AmpliÞer.
BRC> get vswr
VSWR is 1.42:1
8.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get alarms
This command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.
BRC> get alarms
NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED
NOTE
If the get alarms command displays alarms, refer to
the System Troubleshooting section of this manual for
corrective actions.
9.
View the spectrum of the transmitted signal on the R2660 Communications
Analyzer in the Spectrum Analyzer mode. Figure 8-4 shows a sample of the
spectrum.
10.
At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey
This command stops all transmitter activity.
BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED
8-18
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
EBTS071
032394JNM
Figure:8-4
Transmitted Signal Spectrum (800 MHz BR)
Transmitter Verification Procedure
(60W, 900 MHz Power Amplifier – CLN1355)
This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of
the transmit path for 900 MHz Base Radios using 60 Watt Power AmpliÞer,
CLN1355 (kit no. CTF1300).
1.
Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the 1 position.
The following message displays on the service computer during power-up.
B a se R adi o
fi r mware revi si on R X X .X X .X X
Copyright  1998
Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved.
U n author i zed access prohi bi ted
E n ter l ogi n password:
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-19
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
2.
Enter the proper password. After entering the correct password, the BRC>
prompt is displayed on the service computer.
The default password is motorola
NOTE
Motorola recommends that you change the default
password once proper operation of the equipment is
veriÞed.
3.
At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey
This command veriÞes that there is no RF power being transmitted.
BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED
CAUTION
The following command keys the transmitter. Make
sure that transmission only occurs on licensed
frequencies or into an RF load.
8-20
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
4.
At the BRC> prompt, type: set tx_power 60
This command sets the transmitter output to 60 Watts.
B RC > set tx_power 60
s e tti ng transmi tter power to 60 watts
T X LIN ATTE N UATION : 5.000000
TAR GE T P OW E R : 60.00 watts [47.78 dB m]
AC TUA L P OW E R : 56.70 watts [47.54 dB m]
P OW E R W IN D OW : 57.30 -> 62.85 watts [47.58 -> 47.98 dBm ]
T X LIN LE V E L R E GIS TE R R E D U C E D 85 S TE P S [-3.32 d B] .
T X LIN LE V E L: 0x55
c o mpl eted successful l y
After keying the Base Radio, verify the forward and reßected powers of the
station along with the station VSWR with the parameters listed in Table 8-4.
Table 8-4
60W, 900 MHz PA – CLN1355 Transmitter Parameters
Parameter
5.
Value or Range
Forward Power
Greater than 58.0 Watts
Reßected Power
Less than 6.0 Watts
VSWR
Less than 2:1
At the BRC> prompt, type: get fwd_pwr
This command returns the current value of forward power from the RF
Power AmpliÞer.
B RC > g et fwd_pwr
F ORWA R D P OW E R i s 61.0 watts [47.88 dB m]
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-21
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
6.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get ref_pwr
This command returns the current value of reßected power from the RF
Power AmpliÞer.
B R C > g e t r e f_ pwr
R EF L E C T E D P OW E R i s 1.67 watts [32.22 dB m]
7.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get vswr
This command calculates the current Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR)
from the RF Power AmpliÞer.
BRC> get vswr
VSWR is 1.42:1
8.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get alarms
This command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.
BRC> get alarms
NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED
NOTE
If the get alarms command displays alarms, refer to
the System Troubleshooting section of this manual for
corrective actions.
9.
View the spectrum of the transmitted signal on the R2660 Communications
Analyzer in the Spectrum Analyzer mode. Figure 8-5 shows a sample of the
spectrum.
10.
At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey
This command stops all transmitter activity.
BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED
8-22
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
937.5000
EBTS418
EBTS071
101797JNM
032394JNM
Figure:8-5
Transmitted Signal Spectrum (900 MHz BR)
Transmitter Verification Procedure
(40W, 1500 MHz Power Amplifier – TLN3426)
This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of
the transmit path for 1500 MHz Base Radios using a 40 Watt Power AmpliÞer.
1.
Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the 1 position.
The following message displays on the service computer during power-up.
B a se R adi o
fi r mware revi si on R X X .X X .X X
Copyright  1998
Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved.
U n author i zed access prohi bi ted
E n ter l ogi n password:
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-23
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
2.
Enter the proper password. After entering the correct password, the BRC>
prompt is displayed on the service computer.
The default password is motorola
NOTE
Motorola recommends that you change the default
password once proper operation of the equipment is
veriÞed.
3.
At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey
This command veriÞes that there is no RF power being transmitted.
BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED
CAUTION
The following command keys the transmitter. Make
sure that transmission only occurs on licensed
frequencies or into a RF load.
8-24
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
4.
At the BRC> prompt, type: set tx_power 40
This command sets the transmitter output to 40 Watts.
B RC > set tx_power 40
s e tti ng transmi tter power to 40 watts
T X LIN ATTE N UATION : 5.000000
TAR GE T P OW E R : 40.00 watts [46.02 dB m]
AC TUA L P OW E R : 28.38 watts [44.53 dB m]
P OW E R W IN D OW : 38.20-> 41.89 watts [45.82 -> 46.22 dBm ]
T X LIN LE V E L R E GIS TE R R E D U C E D 59 S TE P S [-2.30 d B] .
T X LIN LE V E L: 0x6f
c o mpl eted successful l y
After keying the Base Radio, verify the forward and reßected powers of the
station along with the station VSWR with the parameters listed in Table 8-5.
Table 8-5
40W, 1500 MHz PA Transmitter Parameters
Parameter
5.
Value or Range
Forward Power
Greater than 38.0 Watts
Reßected Power
Less than 4.0 Watts
VSWR
Less than 2:1
At the BRC> prompt, type: get fwd_pwr
This command returns the current value of forward power from the RF
Power AmpliÞer.
B RC > g et fwd_pwr
F ORWA R D P OW E R i s 39.13 watts [45.92 dB m]
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-25
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
6.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get ref_pwr
This command returns the current value of reßected power from the RF
Power AmpliÞer.
B R C > g e t r e f_ pwr
R EF L E C T E D P OW E R i s 0.27 watts [24.28 dB m]
7.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get vswr
This command calculates the current Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR)
from the RF Power AmpliÞer.
BRC> get vswr
VSWR is 1.17:1
8.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get alarms
This command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.
BRC> get alarms
NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED
NOTE
If the get alarms command displays alarms, refer to
the System Troubleshooting section of this manual for
corrective actions.
9.
View the spectrum of the transmitted signal on the R2660 Communications
Analyzer in the Spectrum Analyzer mode. Figure 8-3 shows a sample of the
spectrum.
10.
At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey
This command stops all transmitter activity.
BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED
8-26
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
Figure:8-6
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
Transmitted Signal Spectrum (1500 MHz BR)
8-27
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
Equipment Disconnection
Use the following steps to disconnect equipment after verifying the transmitter.
1.
Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker
switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0)
position.
2.
Disconnect the RS-232 cable from the connector on the service computer.
3.
Disconnect the other end of the RS-232 cable from the RS-232 connector
located on the front panel of the BRC.
4.
Disconnect the test cable from the PA OUT connector located on the
backplane of the Base Radio.
5.
Connect the standard equipment cable to the PA OUT connector.
6.
Disconnect the 10 dB attenuator from the other end of the test cable.
7.
From the attenuator, disconnect the cable to the R2660
Communications Analyzer.
8.
Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch
to the ON (1) position.
If necessary, continue with the Receiver VeriÞcation Procedure.
Receiver Verification
The receiver veriÞcation procedure sends a known test signal to the Base Radio to
verify the receive path. This veriÞcation procedure is recommended after
replacing a Receiver, BRC, or Power Supply module.
NOTE
The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be
out of service. Unless the Base Radio is currently out
of service, Motorola recommends performing this
procedure during off-peak hours. This minimizes or
eliminates disruption of service to system users.
Equipment Setup
Set up the equipment for the receiver veriÞcation procedure as follows:
8-28
1.
Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker
switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0)
position.
2.
Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
3.
Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port located on the
front panel of the BRC.
4.
Disconnect the existing cable from the connector labeled RX1 (or the
connector corresponding to the receiver under test).
This connector is located on the backplane of the Base Radio.
5.
Connect a test cable to the RX 1 connector.
6.
Connect the other end of the test cable to the RF IN/OUT connector on the
R2660 Communications Analyzer.
7.
Remove power from the R2660 and connect the Rubidium Frequency
Standard 10MHZ OUTPUT to a 10 dB attenuator.
8.
Connect the other end of the 10 dB attenuator to the 10MHZ REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR IN/OUT connector on the R2660.
9.
Set the R2660 to the EXT REF mode.
10.
Apply power to the R2660.
NOTE
Refer to the equipment manual provided with the
R2660 for further information regarding mode
conÞguration of the unit (Motorola Part
No. 68P80386B72).
11.
Set the R2660 to the receive frequency of the Base Radio under test.
All receivers within a single Base Radio have the same receive frequency.
12.
Set the R2660 to generate the test signal at an output level of -80dBm.
Receiver Verification Procedure
This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of
the Base Radio receive path. Perform the procedure on all three receivers in each
Base Radio in the EBTS.
The Bit Error Rate (BER) measurement meets speciÞcations at less than 0.01%
(1.0e-02%) to pass the process.
Before you begin the veriÞcation procedure, put the Base Radio into the test mode
of operation to take it out of service. Enable the desired receiver under test and
disable the other receiver(s). In this case the receiver under test is receiver #1.
In the following procedures, enter the software commands as they appear after
the prompt. These commands are in bold letters.
For example, BRC> get rx_freq
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-29
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
13.
Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch
to the ON (1) position.
The following message displays on the service computer during power-up.
Base Radio
fi r mwa re rev i s i on R X X .X X .X X
Copyright  1998
Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved.
U n a u th o r i ze d a ccess prohi bi ted
E n te r l o g i n p a s sword:
14.
Enter the proper password. After entering the correct password, the BRC>
prompt is displayed on the service computer.
The default password is motorola
NOTE
Motorola recommends that you change the default
password once proper operation of the equipment
is veriÞed.
8-30
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
15.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get rx_freq
This command displays the receive frequency for the current Base Radio.
For 800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios, the message respectively appears as:
800 MHz BR:
BRC> get rx_freq
The RX FREQUENCY is: 806.00000
900 MHz BR:
BRC> get rx_freq
The RX FREQUENCY is: 896.000
1500 MHz BR:
BRC> get rx_freq
The RX FREQUENCY is: 1453.000
16.
Verify that the R2660 transmit frequency is set to the frequency determined
in the previous step.
17.
At the BRC> prompt, type: set rx_mode 1
This command is used to enable the antenna/receiver under test.
B RC >set r x_m ode 1
s e t R E C E IV E R 1 to E N A B LE D i n R A M
s e t R E C E IV E R 2 to D IS A B LE D i n R A M
s e t R E C E IV E R 3 to D IS A B LE D i n R A M
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-31
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
18.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get rssi 1 1000
This commands returns the receive signal strength indication. To pass the
BER ßoor test, the Bit Error Rate must be less than 0.01% (1.0e-02%) for the
displayed results.
BRC> get rssi 1 1000
St ar t ing RSSI m onit or fo r 1 r e p e t i t i o n s ave ra g e d e a c h 1 0 0 0 r e p o r t s.
Line RSSI 1
---0
RSSI 2 R S S I 3
SGC
dBm
dBm
dBm
dB
------
------
------
----
- 80. 0
- 131. 5 - 1 3 1 . 5
CI
BER
dBmdBm %
---------------------
OffsetSyncMiss
Hz%
-------
---------
- 7 9 . 2 - 1 2 1 . 9 0 . 0 0 0 e +0 0 - 5 . 4 . 0 0 0 e +0 0
19.
Verify that the RSSI dBm signal strength, for the receiver under test, is
-80.0 dBm ± 1.0 dBm. Adjust the R2660 signal output level to get the
appropriate RSSI dBm level. The BER ßoor % value is valid only if the RSSI
signal strength is within the limits of -81.0 dBm to -79.0 dBm.
20.
At the BRC > prompt, type: get alarms
This command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.
BRC> get alarms
NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED
NOTE
If the get alarms command displays alarms, refer to
the System Troubleshooting section for corrective
actions.
8-32
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
21.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get rx1_kit_no
As shown below respectively for 800 /900/1500 MHz Base Radios, this
command returns the kit number of the receiver.
800 MHz BR:
BRC> get rx1_kit_no
RECEIVER 1 KIT NUMBER IS CRF6010A
900 MHz BR:
BRC> get rx1_kit_no
RECEIVER 1 KIT NUMBER IS CRF6030A
1500 MHz BR:
BRC> get rx1_kit_no
RECEIVER 1 KIT NUMBER IS CRX1020B
NOTE
If the kit number is CRF6010 or CRF6030, continue to
step 22, otherwise to Equipment Disconnection.
22.
At the BRC> prompt, type: get rx_fru_config
This command lists the receivers active for diversity.
BRC> get rx_fru_config
RECEIVER CONFIGURATION {RX1 RX2 RX3}
NOTE
If the antenna conÞguration does not match the
receiver conÞguration, use the set rx_fru_config
MMI command to properly set the parameter.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-33
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
Equipment Disconnection
Disconnect equipment after verifying the receiver as follows:
1.
Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker
switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0)
position.
2.
Disconnect the RS-232 cable from the connector on the service computer.
3.
Disconnect the other end of the RS-232 cable from the RS-232 connector on
the front panel of the BRC.
4.
Disconnect the test cable from the RX 1 connector located on the backplane
of the Base Radio.
5.
Connect the standard equipment cable to the RX 1 connector.
6.
Disconnect the cable to the R2660 Communications Analyzer.
7.
Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch
to the ON (1) position.
This completes the Receiver VeriÞcation Procedure for the receiver under
test.
Repeat the Receiver VeriÞcation Procedure for each receiver in every Base Radio
in the EBTS.
8-34
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Single Channel BR Backplane
Single Channel BR Backplane
Backplane Connectors
All external equipment connections are made on the Base Radio backplane.
Table 8-6 lists and describes each of the connectors on the backplane.
Table 8-6
Base Radio Backplane Connectors
Connector
Description
Type
RX 1 through RX 3
Provides the input path for the received signal to the
Base Radio. Each receiver has an input for one of these
signals.
RF-type
connector in
Table 8
Connect these ports to a multicoupler distribution
system and surge protection circuitry before connecting
them to the receive antennas.
EX OUT/EX FB
PA IN/PA FB
Connects the exciter and PAs together to form the
transmitter for the Base Radio. These connections are
usually made at the factory
These four ports close the feedback loop between these
two modules by connecting EX OUT to the PA IN and
the EX FB to the PA FB
RF-type
connectors
in Table 21
and Table 22
PA OUT
Transmits the RF output of the Base Radio. Connect this
port to a combiner or duplexer before connecting to the
transmit antenna
RF-type
connector in
Table 22
ETHERNET A
Provides Ethernet connectivity to the Base Radio from
the site controller. This Ethernet port connects directly
to the BRC
BNC-type
connector in
Table 18
Serves as both the timing and frequency reference port
for the Base Radio
BNC-type
connector in
Table 20
(or labeled
ETHERNET on
some production
units)
5MHZ/ 1 PPS-A
(or labeled SPARE
on some
production units)
This port is connected to the site timing/frequency
reference.
RS-232
This is a DTE RS-232 interface provided for future use
and is not currently enabled
DB-9-type
connectors
in Table 17
ALARM
Provides the connection for external calibrated power
monitors to the Base Radio
DB-25-type
connector
This connector also provides station DC voltages and
programming lines (SPI) for monitoring/potential
future expansion
AC POWER
Provides connection to AC power supply, if the Base
Radio is equipped with an AC power supply
Line cord
connector
DC POWER
Provides DC power connection, if the Base Radio is
equipped with a DC power supply or an AC power
supply to support the battery revert feature
Card edge
connector
GROUND
Connects the station to ground. A ground stud and a
ground braid on the back of the Base Radio connect the
station to a site ground, such as an appropriately
grounded cabinet
Ground stud
This ground provides increased transient/surge
protection for the station
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-35
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Single Channel BR Backplane
Figure 8-7 shows the locations of the Base Radio external connections.
RX 3
AC POWER
GROUND
RX 2
DC POWER
RX 1
BLACK
RE
EX
EX OUT
PA FB
PA IN
ETHERNET A
5MHZ/1 PPS B
5MHZ/1 PPS A
ALARM
RS 232
PA OUT
This port must be terminated by 50Ω load when configured for
2 Branch Diversity. Also, the rx_fru_config parameter must be set to R12.
Figure:8-7
EBTS327
021997JNM
Base Radio Backplane Connectors
Backplane RF Connections
When Base Radios are shipped from the factory as FRUs, each connection on the
back of a repeater has a designated color dot beside it as listed in Table 8-7. To
Þnd where a cable should be connected, match the label wrapped around the
cable to the dot on the back of the repeater.
Table 8-7
Color Codes for RF Connections on Rear of Base Radio
Connectors
TX
8-36
Color Dot Code
Orange
RX 1
Red
RX 2
Green
RX 3
Yellow
Ethernet
White
5 MHz/1 pps A
or Spare
Gray
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Single Channel BR Backplane
Backplane Connector Pinouts
Table 8 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P1 connector
of the Base Radio Controller board.
Table 8
P1 Connector Pin-outs
Pin No.
Row A
Row B
Row C
Table 12 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P1
connector for Receiver 1.
Table 9
P1 Connector Pin-outs
Pin No.
Row A
Row B
Row C
AGC3
GND
AGC1
AGC4
GND
AGC2
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
AGC3
14.2V
AGC1
AGC4
14.2V
AGC2
GND
GND
GND
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
RESET
GND
GND
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
BATT_STAT
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CTS
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RTS
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
10
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
10
SHUTDOWN
5V
11
RCLK
5V
DATA1
12
ODC_1
5V
DATA1*
13
TCLK
GND
DATA3
11
GND
GND
GND
12
GND
GND
GND
13
DATA1*
GND
GND
14
DATA1
GND
GND
15
ODC_1
GND
GND
16
GND
GND
GND
17
GND
GND
GND
18
SBI_1
GND
GND
19
GND
GND
GND
20
GND
GND
GND
14
ODC_3
GND
DATA3*
15
RXD
GND
DATA2
16
ODC_2
17
TXD
18
SSI
SBI_1
19
SSI*
SBI_3
22
20
BRG
SBI_2
23
A5
21
CLK
24
WP*
22
CLK*
23
GND
24
A5
DATA2*
GND
GND
GND
21
A4
25
A3
26
A2
27
A0_CS1
A1_CS2
A4_RXSEL
SPI_MISO
25
A0
GND
A1
28
SPI_MOSI
26
CD
GND
5MHZ/
SPARE
29
SPI_CLK
30
GND
GND
27
METER_STAT
GND
SPI_MISO
31
GND
GND
GND
28
WP*
GND
SPI_CLK
32
GND
GND
2.1MHZ_RX
29
GND
GND
SPI_MOSI
30
GND
GND
GD
31
1PPS_GPS
GND
2.1MHZ_TX
32
GND
GND
2.1MHZ_RX
GND
NOTE: * Enabled low
NOTE: * = enabled low
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-37
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Single Channel BR Backplane
Table 13 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P2
connector for Receiver 2.
Table 10
Table 11
P2 Connector Pin-outs
P3 Connector Pin-outs
Pin No.
Row A
Row B
Row C
Pin No.
Row A
Row B
Row C
AGC3
GND
AGC1
AGC3
GND
AGC1
AGC4
GND
AGC2
AGC4
GND
AGC2
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
10
5V
5V
5V
10
5V
5V
5V
11
GND
GND
GND
11
GND
GND
GND
12
GND
GND
GND
12
GND
GND
GND
13
DATA2*
GND
GND
13
DATA3*
GND
GND
14
DATA2
GND
GND
14
DATA3
GND
GND
15
ODC_2
GND
GND
15
ODC_3
GND
GND
16
GND
GND
GND
16
GND
GND
GND
17
GND
GND
GND
17
GND
GND
GND
18
SBI_2
GND
GND
18
SBI_3
GND
GND
19
GND
GND
GND
19
GND
GND
GND
20
GND
GND
GND
20
GND
GND
GND
A0_CS1
21
21
22
A1_CS2
22
A0_CS1
A1_CS2
23
A5
23
A5
24
WP*
24
WP*
25
A3_RXSEL
25
26
27
A2_RXSEL
26
SPI_MISO
27
28
SPI_MOSI
29
SPI_CLK
30
GND
GND
31
GND
GND
32
GND
GND
NOTE: * Enabled low
8-38
Table 11 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P3 connector
for Receiver 3.
SPI_MISO
28
SPI_MOSI
29
SPI_CLK
GND
30
GND
GND
GND
GND
31
GND
GND
GND
2.1MHZ_RX
32
GND
GND
2.1MHZ_RX
NOTE: * Enabled low
68P81095E02- D
4/1/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Single Channel BR Backplane
Table 14 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P5
connector of the Exciter.
Table 12 lists the pin-outs for the 48-pin P2
connector of the 3X Receiver.
Table 12
Pin
No.
P2 Connector Pin-outs
Table 14
Row A
Row B
Row C
Row D
GND
AGC4
AGC3
GND
GND
AGC2
AGC1
A0
GND
RX1_DAT
RX1_DAT
A1
GND
RX1_SBI
RX1_ODC
GND
RX2_DAT
5V
Pin No.
P5 Connector Pin-outs
Row A
Row B
Row C
28V
28V
28V
28V
28V
28V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
14.2V
A2
5V
5V
5V
RX2_DAT
A3
5V
5V
5V
GND
GND
EXT_VFWD
RX2_SBI
RX2_ODC
A4
GND
GND
EXT_VREF
GND
RX3_DAT
RX3_DAT
A5
GND
RX3_SBI
RX3_ODC
WP*
10
GND
GND
GND
14.2V
SCLK
MOSI
MISO
11
GND
GND
VBLIN
10
14.2V
GND
GND
GND
12
GND
GND
RESET
11
14.2V
GND
REF
GND
12
GND
GND
GND
GND
14
GND
GND
GND
15
GND
GND
SPI_MISO
16
A0
GND
GND
17
GND
GND
SPI_CLK
18
A1
GND
WP*
19
GND
GND
GND
20
A5
GND
SPI_MOSI
21
GND
GND
GND
22
A4
GND
GND
23
GND
GND
CLK*
24
A3
GND
GND
NOTE: Row A is make first, break last.
Table 13 lists the pin-outs for the 16-pin P3
connector of the 3X Receiver.
Table 13
P3 Connector Pin-outs
Pin
No.
Row
Row B
GND
Row C
Row
Row E
GND
GND
GND
GND
RX1
GND
13
25
GND
GND
CLK
26
GND
GND
GND
27
GND
GND
SSI*
28
GND
GND
GND
29
GND
GND
SSI
30
GND
GND
GND
31
GND
GND
2.1MHz_TX
32
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RX2
GND
GND
RX3
GND
GND
NOTE: * = enabled low
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-39
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Single Channel BR Backplane
Table 15 lists the pin-outs for the 96-pin P6
connector of the Power AmpliÞer.
Table 15
Pin No.
P6 Connector Pin-outs
Row A
Row B
Row C
VBLIN
GND
28V
GND
GND
28V
A0
GND
28V
GND
GND
28V
A1
GND
28V
GND
GND
28V
A2
GND
28V
GND
GND
28V
A3
GND
28V
10
GND
GND
28V
11
SPI_MISO
GND
28V
12
GND
GND
28V
13
SPI_MOSI
GND
28V
14
GND
GND
28V
15
SPI_CLK
GND
28V
16
GND
GND
28V
17
WP*
GND
28V
18
GND
GND
28V
19
GND
GND
28V
20
GND
GND
28V
21
GND
GND
28V
22
GND
GND
28V
23
GND
GND
28V
24
GND
GND
28V
25
GND
5V
28V
26
GND
5V
28V
27
GND
14.2V
28V
28
GND
14.2V
28V
29
GND
14.2V
28V
30
GND
14.2V
28V
31
GND
28V
28V
32
GND
28V
28V
Table 16
P7 Connector Pin-outs
Pin No.
Signal
SPI_MISO
SPI_MOSI
SPI_CLK
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
10
GND
11
28V
12
14.2V
13
14.2V
14
WP*
15
5V
16
GND
17
BATT_STAT
18
MTR_STAT
19
EXT_VFWD
20
EXT_VREF
21
GND
22
GND
23
BAT_TEMP
24
VAT_TEMP
25
GND
NOTE: * = enabled low
Table 17 lists the pin-outs for the 9-pin P8
RS-232 connector.
Table 18 lists the pin-outs for P13. Tables 19
through 22 list the pin-outs for the SMA and
blindmate connectors for Receivers 1- 3, BRC,
Exciter and PA.
Table 23 lists the pin-outs for 78-pin P9 connector of
the Power Supply.
NOTE: * = enabled low
Table 16 lists the pin-outs for the 25-pin P7 Alarm
8-40
68P81095E02- D
4/1/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Single Channel BR Backplane
Table 17
P8 Connector Pin-outs
Pin No.
Signal
CD
RxD
TxD
RCLK
GND
TCLK
RTS
CTS
BRG
Table 18
P13 Connector Pin-outs
Connector
Signal
ETHERNET - A (or 5MHZ IN*)
* May appear as indicated in parenthesis on some production
units.
Table 19
SMA Connectors- Receivers
Connector
Signal
P19
RCV ONE RF IN
P20
RCV TWO RF IN
P21
RCV THREE RF IN
Table 20
Blind Mates - BRC
Connector
Signal
P10
SPARE* (or 5MHZ/1 PPS - A)
P11
ETHERNET* (or ETHERNET - A)
*May appear as indicated in parenthesis on some production
units.
Table 21
Blind Mates - Exciter
Connector
Signal
P14
EXCITER OUT
P15
EXCITER FEEDBACK
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-41
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Single Channel BR Backplane
Blind Mates - PA
Table 22
Connector
Signal
P16
PA FEEDBACK
P17
PA IN
P18
PA RF OUT
Table 23
8-42
P9 Connector Pin-outs
Pin No.
Signal
GND
GND
28V
28V
28V
28V
28V
28V
28V
10
28V
11
28V
12
28V
13
28V
14
28V
15
28V
16
14.2V
17
14.2V
18
14.2V
19
14.2V
20
14.2V
21
14.2V
22
14.2V
23
14.2V
24
5V
25
5V
26
5V
27
5V
28
5V
29
5V
30
5V
31
5V
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Single Channel BR Backplane
Table 23
P9 Connector Pin-outs (Continued)
Pin No.
Signal
32
GND
33
GND
34
GND
35
GND
36
GND
37
GND
38
GND
39
GND
40
GND
41
GND
42
GND
43
GND
44
GND
45
GND
46
GND
47
GND
48
GND
49
GND
50
GND
51
GND
52
GND
53
GND
54
SCR_SHUT
55
SCR_THRESH
56
RELAY_ENABLE
57
SHUTDOWN
58
28V_AVG
59
BATT_TEMP
60
SPI_MISO
61
SPI_MOSI
62
SPI_CLK
63
64
65
66
67
A0(CS1)
68
A1(CS2)
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
8-43
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Single Channel BR Backplane
Table 23
P9 Connector Pin-outs (Continued)
Pin No.
Signal
69
A5
70
71
A4
72
8-44
73
A3
74
GND
75
A2
76
GND
77
GND
78
GND
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Single Channel BR Backplane
Base Radio Signals
Table 8-24 lists and describes the Base Radio signals.
Table 8-24
Base Radio Signal Descriptions
Signal Name
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E02- D
4/1/2000
Signal Description
GND
Station ground
28V
28VDC
14.2V
14.2VDC
5.1V
5.1 VDC
A0,A1,A2,A3,A4,A5
The BRC uses these lines to address station modules and
devices on those modules
SPI_MOSI
Serial Processor Interface - Master out slave in Data
SPI_MISO
Serial Processor Interface - Master in slave out Data
SPI_CLK
Serial Processor Interface - Clock signal (100 KHz - 1 MHz)
AGC1, AGC2, AGC3, AGC4
BRC uses these lines to set the digital attenuator's on the
receiver(s) for SGC functionality
2.1MHz_RX
2.1MHz generated on the BRC and used as a reference by
the Receiver(s)
2.1MHz_TX
2.1MHz generated on the BRC and used as a reference by
the Exciter
DATA1, DATA1*
This differential pair carries receiver 1 data to the Base
Radio Controller
DATA2 DATA2*
This differential pair carries receiver 2 data to the Base
Radio Controller
DATA3, DATA3*
This differential pair carries receiver 3 data to the Base
Radio Controller
ODC_1, ODC_2, ODC_3
Clocks used to clock differential receive data from each
respective receiver to the BRC
SBI_1, SBI_2, SBI_3
Serial Bus Interface - These lines are used to program the
custom receiver IC on each receiver
SSI, SSI*
Differential transmit data from the Exciter to the BRC
CLK, CLK*
Differential Data clock used to clock transmit data from the
BRC to the Exciter
BRCVBLIN
Programmable bias voltage generated on the Exciter and used to
bias the Power ampliÞer devices
VBLIN
Programmable bias voltage generated on the Exciter and used
to bias the Power ampliÞer devices
RESET
Output from BRC to Exciter (currently not used)
EXT_VFWD
DC voltage representing the forward power at the antenna as
measured by the external wattmeter
EXT_VREF
DC voltage representing the reßected power at the antenna as
measured by the external wattmeter
WP*
Write protect line used by the BRC to write to serial EEPROMs
located on each module
BAT_STAT
Binary ßag used to signal BRC to monitor the External battery
supply alarm
8-45
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Single Channel BR Backplane
Table 8-24
Base Radio Signal Descriptions (Continued)
Signal Name
Signal Description
METER_STAT
Binary ßag used by the BRC to indicate to the BRC it
should monitor
1PPS
Global Positioning System - 1 pulse per second (this may be
combined with 5MHz at the site frequency reference
RCLK
RS-232 - Receive clock
TCLK
RS-232 - Transmit clock
CTS
RS-232 - Clear to send
RTS
RS-232 - Request to send
CD
RS-232 - Carrier detect
RXD
RS-232 - Receive data
TXD
RS-232 - Transmit data
BRG
RS-232 - Baud rate generator
5MHz / Spare
signal currently not used
EXCITER_OUT
Forward transmit path QQAM at approximately a 11dBm level
EXCITER_FEEDBACK
Signal comes from the PA at approximately a 16dBm. Used to
close the cartesian RF_LOOP
PA_IN
4 dBm QQAM forward path of the transmitter
PA_FEEDBACK
Signal to the Exciter at approximately 16dBm. Used to close the
cartesian RF_LOOP
RX1_IN
RF into Receiver 1
RX2_IN
RF into Receiver 2
RX3_IN
RF into Receiver 3
5MHZ REFERENCE
5MHz station/site reference. Signal comes from the redundant
site frequency reference and usually is multiplexed with the
1PPS signal from the global positioning satellite input to the
site frequency reference
ETHERNET
Interface between the BRC and the ACG. This connects the
Base to the 10 MHz LAN
SCR_SHUT
Signal currently not used
SCR_THRESH
Signal currently not used
RELAY ENABLE
Signal currently not used
SHUTDOWN
Input signal from the BRC to the Power supply. Used to
exercise a station "hard startÓ
28V_AVG
Signal currently not used
BATT_TEMP
DC voltage from the external batteries used to represent the
temperature of the batteries. Signal used only with AC
power supplies
NOTE: * = enabled low
8-46
68P81095E02- D 4/1/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
9 Troubleshooting
QUAD Channel Base
Radios
Overview
This chapter is a guide for installing a Quad Base Radio and isolating Base Radio
failures to the FRU level. The chapter contains procedures for:
❐
Troubleshooting
❐
Installation
❐
VeriÞcation
❐
Station Operation
The Base Radio maintenance philosophy is repair by replacing defective FRUs
with new FRUs. This maintenance method limits down-time, and quickly
restores the Base Radio to normal operation.
Two Base Radio troubleshooting procedures appear here. Each procedure quickly
identifies faulty FRUs.
Ship defective FRUs to a Motorola repair depot for repair.
Recommended Test Equipment
Table 9-1 lists recommended test equipment for performing Base Radio
troubleshooting and veriÞcation procedures.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
9-1
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Table 9-1
Recommended Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Model Number
Use
Communications Analyzer
R2660 w/iDEN option
Used for checking receive and
transmit operation (iDEN
signaling capability) and station
alignment
Signal Generator
HP4432b
RX testing
Dummy Load (50 Ω, 150 W)
none
Used to terminate output
3 way RF splitter
none
Used to connect Hp4432b to Base
radio
Service Computer
IBM or clone, 80286 or
better
Local service terminal
Portable Rubidium
Frequency Standard
Ball Efratom
Frequency standard for R2660,
netting TFR
Power Meter
none
Used to measure reßected and
forward power
RF Attenuator, 250 W, 10 dB
Motorola 0180301E72
Protection for R2660
Communication
Procomm Plus
Local service computer
Quad BR waveform
Motorola supplied
with HP4432b
Software:
9-2
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Troubleshooting Procedures
Many troubleshooting and station operation procedures require Man-Machine
Interface (MMI) commands. These commands communicate station level
commands to the Base Radio via the RS-232 communications port on the front of
the BRC.
Routine Checkout
Procedure 1 is a quick, non-intrusive test performed during a routine site visit.
Use this procedure to verify proper station operation without taking the station
out of service. Figure 9-1 shows the Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart.
ROUTINE
SITE VISIT
PROCEDURE 1
OBSERVE LED
INDICATORS
Refer to
Controls and Indicators
for LED Definitions
Module Suspected
of Being Faulty?
Yes
Go to Troubleshooting
Procedure 2 Flow Chart
No
CHECK CURRENT
ALARM STATUS
Use MMI command
get alarms
to check alarm status
Module Suspected
of Being Faulty?
Yes
Go to Troubleshooting
Procedure 2 Flow Chart
No
DONE
EBTS021
071895JNM
Figure:9-1
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart
9-3
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Reported/Suspected Problem
Use Procedure 2 to troubleshoot reported or suspected equipment malfunctions.
Perform this procedure with equipment in service (non-intrusive) and with
equipment taken temporarily out of service (intrusive).
Figure 9-2 shows the Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart.
PROBLEM
REPORTED OR SUSPECTED
PROCEDURE 2
OBSERVE LED
INDICATORS
Refer to
Controls and Indicators
for LED Definitions
Module Suspected
of Being Faulty?
Yes
Go to Module Replacement
Procedures Section
No
CHECK CURRENT
ALARM STATUS
Use MMI command
get alarms
to check alarm status
Module Suspected
of Being Faulty?
Yes
Go to Module Replacement
Procedures Section
No
PERFORM
VERIFICATION TESTS
Use MMI commands to
perform tests as specified in
station verification procedure.
Module Suspected
of Being Faulty?
Yes
Go to Module Replacement
Procedures Section
No
DONE
Clear Problem Report
EBTS022
071895JNM
Figure:9-2
9-4
Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU
Replacement Procedures
Replace suspected station modules with known non-defective modules to restore
the station to proper operation. The following procedures provide FRU
replacement instructions, post-replacement adjustments and veriÞcation
instructions.
Base Radio Replacement Procedure
NOTE
Base Radio removal and installation procedures
appear for reference or buildout purposes. Field
maintenance of Base Radios typically consists of
replacement of FRUs within the Base Radio. Perform
Base Radio FRU replacement according to ÒBase Radio
FRU Replacement ProcedureÓ below.
Perform Base Radio (BR) replacement as described in the following paragraphs.
CAUTION
Improper lifting or dropping the BR could result in
serious personal injury or equipment damage.
Base Radios are HEAVY!
Handle the BR with extreme caution, and according to
local health and safety regulations.
Removal
Remove the BR from the Equipment Cabinet as follows:
CAUTION
A Single Carrier BR can weigh up to 76 LBS (34 KG). A
Quad Carrier BR can weigh up to 91 LBS (41 KG).
Handle the BR with extreme caution, and according to
local health and safety regulations.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
9-5
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures
1.
Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply ON/OFF
switch to the OFF position.
2.
Tag and disconnect the cabling from the BR rear panel connectors.
3.
Remove the Power AmpliÞer module to reduce the BR weight. Remove the
two M10 Torx screws that secure the Power AmpliÞer module. Slide the
module out of the chassis.
4.
Remove the four M30 TORX screws which secure the BR front panel to the
Equipment Cabinet mounting rails.
5.
While supporting the BR, carefully remove the BR from the Equipment
Cabinet by sliding the BR from the front of cabinet. When the BR becomes free
from its mounting rails, be sure to fully support it.
Installation
Install BR in Equipment Cabinet as follows:
CAUTION
A Single Carrier BR can weigh up to 76 LBS (34 KG). A
Quad Carrier BR can weigh up to 91 LBS (41 KG).
Handle the BR with extreme caution, and according to
local health and safety regulations.
9-6
1.
If adding a BR, install side rails in the appropriate BR mounting position in
the rack.
2.
Remove the Power AmpliÞer module to reduce the BR weight. Remove the
two M10 Torx screws that secure the Power AmpliÞer module. Slide the
module out of the chassis.
3.
While supporting the BR, carefully lift and slide the BR in the Equipment
Cabinet mounting position.
4.
Secure the BR to the Equipment Cabinet mounting rails using four M30 Torx
screws. Tighten the screws to 40 in-lb (4.5 Nm).
5.
Slide the Power AmpliÞer module back into the BR chassis. Replace two
M10 Torx screws that secure the Power AmpliÞer module. Secure the
module by tightening the screws to the speciÞed torque of 5 in-lbs.
6.
Connect the cabinet cabling to the BR. Refer to Backplane Þgure XX.
7.
Perform BR activation as decribed below.
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures
NOTE
Base Radio removal and installation procedures
appear for reference or buildout purposes. Field
maintenance of Base Radios typically consists of
replacement of FRUs within the Base Radio. Perform
Base Radio FRU replacement according to ÒBase Radio
FRU Replacement ProcedureÓ below.
Anti-Static Precautions
CAUTION
The Base Radio contains static-sensitive devices.
Prevent electrostatic discharge damage to Base Radio
modules! When replacing Base Radio FRUs, wear a
grounded wrist strap. Observe proper anti-static
procedures.
Motorola publication 68P81106E84 provides complete static protection
information. This publication is available through Motorola National Parts.
Observe the following additional precautions:
❐
Wear a wrist strap (Motorola Part No. 4280385A59 or equivalent) at all times
when servicing the Base Radio to minimize static build-up.
❐
A grounding clip is provided with each EBTS cabinet. If not available, use
another appropriate grounding point.
❐
DO NOT insert or remove modules with power applied to the Base Radio.
ALWAYS turn the power OFF using the Power Supply rocker switch on the
front of the Power Supply module.
❐
Keep spare modules in factory packaging for transporting. When shipping
modules, always pack in original packaging.
FRU Replacement Procedure
Perform the following steps to replace any of the Base Radio FRUs:
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
9-7
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures
NOTE
After a Control Board or BR replacement, the
integrated Site Controller (iSC) reboots the BR.
Whenever the BR goes off-line, the Replacement BRC
Accept Timer begins counting down. A BR reboot
occurs if the BR remains off-line as the timer times out.
(The timerÕs default period is three minutes.) If
someone turns on the BR before the timer times out,
power down the BR. Then wait for the minimum
timer period before turning on the BR.
1.
Notice the Power Supply rocker switch, behind the front panel of the Power
Supply. Set the Power Supply rocker switch to the OFF (0) position. Turning
off this switch removes power from the Base Radio.
2.
Loosen the front panel fasteners. These are located on each side of the
module being replaced.
3.
Pull out the module.
4.
Insert the non-defective replacement module by aligning the module side
rails with the appropriate rail guides inside the Base Radio chassis.
5.
Gently push the replacement module completely into the Base Radio chassis
assembly using the module handle(s).
CAUTION
DO NOT slam or force the module into the chassis
assembly. Rough handling can damage the connectors
or backplane.
9-8
6.
Secure the replacement module by tightening the front panel fasteners to the
speciÞed torque of 5 in-lbs.
7.
Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the switch to the ON position.
8.
Perform the Station VeriÞcation Procedure.
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU Replacement Procedures
Power Amplifier (PA) Fan FRU Replacement
Perform the following steps to replace the Power AmpliÞer (PA) fans.
1.
Remove the Power AmpliÞer from the Base Radio per FRU Replacement
Procedure.
2.
Disconnect fan power cable from PA housing.
3.
Remove front panel from fan assembly.
4.
Remove fan assembly from PA chassis.
NOTE
To install the new fan kit, reverse above procedure.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
9-9
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
Station Verification Procedures
Perform the Station VeriÞcation Procedures whenever you replace a FRU. The
procedures verify transmit and receive operations. Each procedure also contains
the equipment setup.
Replacement FRU Verification
Before shipment, the factory programs all module-speciÞc information. Base
Radio speciÞc information (e.g., receive and transmit frequencies) involves a
download to the Base Radio from the network/site controller.
The Base Radio does not require replacement FRU alignment.
Base Repeater FRU Hardware Revision Verification
NOTE
The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be
out of service. Unless the Base Radio is currently out
of service, Motorola recommends performing this
procedure during off-peak hours. Performing this
procedure then minimizes or eliminates disruption of
service to system users.
1.
Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.
2.
Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port, located on the
front panel of the EX/CNTL module.
3.
Power on the BR using the front switch on the Power Supply Module. Press
the reset button on the Control Module front panel. At the prompt, hit a
Carriage Return on the service computer to enter the test application mode.
Using the password Motorola, log in to the BR.
:> l og i n - u f ie ld
p a sswor d: *****
fi e l d>m o t o ro la
fi e l d>
9-10
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
4.
Collect revision numbers from the station by typing the
following command:
fi e ld > fv -o p la tfo r m
field>
5.
If all modules return revision numbers of the format ÒRxx.xx.xxÓ, then all
revision numbers are present. In that case, veriÞcation requires no further
action. If revision numbers return as blank, or not in the format ÒRxx.xx.xxÓ,
contact your local Motorola representative or Technical Support.
6.
Set desired cabinet id and position and of BR by typing the following
commands with the Þnal number on each command being the desired
cabinet id and position. The command example below sets cabinet id to 5,
and cabinet position to 2.
fi e ld > c i -o p la tfo r m -c 5
fi e ld > p i -o p la tfo r m -p 2
field>
7.
After checking all BRs, log out by keying the following command:
field> logout
field>
Transmitter Verification
The transmitter veriÞcation procedure veriÞes transmitter operation and transmit
path integrity. Motorola recommends this veriÞcation procedure after replacing
an Exciter, Power AmpliÞer, BRC, or Power Supply module.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
9-11
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
NOTE
The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be
out of service. Unless the Base Radio is currently out
of service, Motorola recommends performing this
procedure during off-peak hours. Performing this
procedure then minimizes or eliminates disruption of
service to system users.
Equipment Setup
To set up the equipment, use the following procedure:
1.
Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker
switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0)
position.
2.
Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.
3.
Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port located on the
front panel of the BRC.
4.
Disconnect the existing cable from the connector labeled PA OUT. This
connector is located on the backplane of the Base Radio.
5.
Connect a test cable to the PA OUT connector.
6.
Connect a 10 dB attenuator on the other end of the test cable.
7.
From the attenuator, connect a cable to the RF IN/OUT connector on the
R2660 Communications Analyzer.
8.
Remove power from the R2660. Connect the Rubidium Frequency Standard
10MHZ OUTPUT to a 10 dB attenuator.
9.
Connect the other end of the 10 dB attenuator to the 10MHZ REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR IN/OUT connector on the R2660.
NOTE
Refer to the R2660 equipment manual for further
information regarding mode conÞguration of the unit.
(Motorola Part No. 68P80386B72.)
9-12
10.
Set the R2660 to the EXT REF mode.
11.
Apply power to the R2660.
12.
Set the R2660 to the SPECTRUM ANALYZER mode with the center
frequency set to the transmit frequency of the Base Radio under test.
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
13.
Perform the appropriate transmitter veriÞcation procedure below for the
particular Power AmpliÞer used in the Base Radio.
Transmitter Verification Procedure
(QUAD Carrier 800 MHz Power Amplifiers)
This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of
the transmit path for 800 MHz Base Radios using a 70 Watt Power AmpliÞer.
1.
Power on the BR using the front switch on the Power Supply Module. Press
the reset button on the Control Module front panel. At the prompt, hit a
Carriage Return on the service computer to enter the test application mode.
Using the password Motorola, login to the BR.
:> lo g in -u fie ld
pa s swo rd : * * * * *
fi eld >mo to ro la
fi eld >
2.
Dekey the BR to verify that no RF power is being transmitted. Set the
transmit DSP test mode to Òstop.Ó At the Þeld> prompt, type:
fi e ld > p tm -o tx _ a ll -ms to p
fi e ld > p owe r -o tx ch 1 -p 0
fi e ld >
CAUTION
The following command keys the transmitter. Make
sure that transmission only occurs on licensed
frequencies, or into an RF dummy load.
3.
Key the BR to 40 watts, following the steps below from the Þeld> prompt :
3.1
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
Set the frequency of transmit channel 1 through 4.
9-13
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
fi el d> f re q - o t x ch 1 -f8 6 0
fi el d> f re q - o t x ch 2 -f8 6 0 .0 2 5
fi el d> f re q - o t x ch 3 -f8 6 0 .0 5
fi el d> f re q - o t x ch 4 -f8 6 0 .0 7 5
fi el d>
3.2
Set the transmit DSP test mode to Òdnlk_framed.Ó
fi el d> p t m - o t x_ a ll -md n lk _ fr a me d
fi el d>
3.3
Enable the channels by setting a data pattern to Òiden.Ó
fi el d> d p m - o t x ch 1 -mid e n
fi el d> d p m - o t x ch 2 -mid e n
fi el d> d p m - o t x ch 3 -mid e n
fi el d> d p m - o t x ch 4 -mid e n
fi el d>
3.4
Set the transmit power to 40 watts and key the BR.
field> power -otxch1 -p40
fi el d>
4.
After keying the Base Radio, verify the stationÕs forward and reßected
power and VSWR. Check these Þgures against the parameters in Table 9-2.
Table 9-2
QUAD BRTransmitter Parameters
Parameter
9-14
Value or Range
Forward Power
Greater than 36 Watts
Reßected Power
Less than 2.0 Watts
VSWR
Less than 1.6:1
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
4.1
Check channel 1. At the Þeld> prompt, type:
field> power -otxch1
fi e ld >
4.2
Check channel 2. At the Þeld> prompt, type:
field> power -otxch2
fi e ld >
4.3
Check channel 3. At the Þeld> prompt, type:
field> power -otxch3
fi e ld >
4.4
Check channel 4. At the Þeld> prompt, type:
field> power -otxch4
fi e ld >
5.
This command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio. At the Þeld>
prompt, type:
field> alarms -ofault_hndlr
field>
NOTE
If the alarms command displays alarms, refer to the
System Troubleshooting chapter for corrective actions.
6.
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
View the spectrum of the transmitted signal on the R2660 Communications
Analyzer. Use the Spectrum Analyzer mode. Figure 9-3 shows a sample of
the spectrum.
9-15
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
Figure:9-3
7.
Quad Channel Spectrum (800 MHz BR)
Dekey the BR to verify that no RF power is being transmitted. Set the
transmit DSP test mode to Òstop." At the Þeld> prompt, type:
field> ptm -otx_all -mstop
field> power -otxch1 -p0
field>
Equipment Disconnection
Use the following steps to disconnect equipment after verifying the transmitter.
9-16
1.
Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker
switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0)
position.
2.
Disconnect the RS-232 cable from the connector on the service computer.
3.
Disconnect the other end of the RS-232 cable from the RS-232 connector
located on the front panel of the BRC.
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
4.
Disconnect the test cable from the PA OUT connector located on the
backplane of the Base Radio.
5.
Connect the standard equipment cable to the PA OUT connector.
6.
Disconnect the 10 dB attenuator from the other end of the test cable.
7.
From the attenuator, disconnect the cable to the R2660
Communications Analyzer.
8.
Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch
to the ON (1) position.
9.
If necessary, continue with the Receiver VeriÞcation Procedure.
Receiver Verification
The receiver veriÞcation procedure sends a known test signal into the Base Radio
to verify the receive path. This veriÞcation procedure is recommended after
replacing a Receiver.
NOTE
The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be
out of service. Unless the base radio is currently out of
service, Motorola recommends performing this
procedure during off-peak hours. Performing this
procedure then minimizes or eliminates disruption of
services to system users.
Equipment Setup
Set up equipment for the receiver veriÞcation procedure as follows:
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
1.
Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker
switch (located behind the front panel of the Power Supply) to the OFF (0)
position.
2.
Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.
3.
Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port located on the
front panel of the BRC.
4.
Disconnect the existing cable from the connector labeled RX1 (or the
connector corresponding to the receiver under test). Connector RX1 is on the
Base Radio backplane.
5.
Connect a test cable to the RX 1 connector.
6.
Use an HP4432b to measure BR performance
9-17
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
7.
Attach RF output from the HP4432b to a 3 way splitter. Attach the output of
the three way splitter to the antenna connections in the back of the BR.
8.
Attach the 'event 2' port in the rear panel to pin 6 on the front panel of the
BR.
9.
The 4432b must have the Proprietary Tornado downlink Þles to be
conÞgured correctly.
10.
Turn on the 4432b. Press the 'mode' key. Select the 'arbitrary waveform
generator'. Select 'Dual Arb'. Goto 'waveform select' and choose Tornado.
Choose 'waveform segments'. Select the 'load' softkey. Choose the softkey
'Store all To NVARB Memory'. Press the 'return' softkey.
11.
Select 'ARB setup' and set the sample clock to 100khz.
12.
Attach the TFR 5Mhz to the 'Gen ref in'.
13.
Set the reference frequency to the correct frequency (5Mhz) and select 'ARB
Reference' EXT for external reference.
14.
Select the I/Q key. Goto the next page by selecting 'More (1 of 2)'. Turn 'ALC'
off by selecting the softkey.
15.
Select the 'Mode' key again, followed by the 'arbitrary waveform generator'
softkey, 'Dual Arb'
16.
Set the frequency and power out and turn on the modulation and RF out.
Receiver Verification Procedure
This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of
Base Radio receiver paths. Perform the procedure on all four receivers in the BR.
1.
Power on the BR using the front switch on the Power Supply Module. Press
the reset button on the Control Module front panel. At the prompt, hit a
Carriage Return on the service computer to enter the test application mode.
Using the password Motorola, login to the BR..
>l o g i n – u fi e ld
>pa sswor d: **** *
fi e l d>m o t o ro la
fi e l d>
2.
9-18
ConÞgure the arbitrary waveform generator (ARB) and Vector Signal
Generator A to generate the desired Q-QAM test signal in a 3RX mode at the
desired frequency. The RF Power Out of Vector Signal Generator A should
be set to -108 dBm
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
3.
Using the MMI commands below, issue the command to put the BR into
3RX mode. If the resulting bit error rates for receiver branches 1, 2, and 3 are
less than 8%, the receiver has passed the test.
3.1
Start by checking Receiver 1. At the Þeld> prompt, type:
fi e ld > fr e q -o r x ch 1 -f8 1 0
fi e ld > e n a ble -o r x ch 1 -s o n
fi e ld > s g e -o r x _ a ll -s o ff
fi e ld > e s -o r x _ a ll -tex t_ tr igg e r
fi e ld > p e e r _ p e r fo r ma n c e _ c o n fig -o r x ch 1 -mp a th -p a ll
fi e ld > p e e r _ p e r fo r ma n c e _ r e p o r t -o r x ch 1 -a 1 0 0 -r 1
field>
3.2
Check Receiver 2. At the Þeld> prompt, type:
fi e ld > fr e q -o r x ch 2 -f8 1 0
fi e ld > e n a ble -o r x ch 2 -s o n
fi e ld > s g e -o r x _ a ll -s o ff
fi e ld > e s -o r x _ a ll -tex t_ tr igg e r
fi e ld > p e e r _ p e r fo r ma n c e _ c o n fig -o r x ch 2 -mp a th -p a ll
fi e ld > p e e r _ p e r fo r ma n c e _ r e p o r t -o r x ch 2 -a 1 0 0 -r 1
field>
3.3
Check Receiver 3. At the Þeld> prompt, type:
fi e ld > fr e q -o r x ch 3 -f8 1 0
fi e ld > e n a ble -o r x ch 3 -s o n
fi e ld > s g e -o r x _ a ll -s o ff
fi e ld > e s -o r x _ a ll -tex t_ tr igg e r
fi e ld > p e e r _ p e r fo r ma n c e _ c o n fig -o r x ch 3 -mp a th -p a ll
fi e ld > p e e r _ p e r fo r ma n c e _ r e p o r t -o r x ch 3 -a 1 0 0 -r 1
field>
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
9-19
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Station Verification Procedures
3.4
Check Receiver 4. At the Þeld> prompt, type:
fi el d> f re q - o rxch 4 -f8 1 0
fi el d> en a ble - or x ch 4 -s o n
fi el d> sg e - o rx_ a ll -s o ff
fi el d> es - o rx_ a ll -tex t_ tr igg e r
fi el d> p ee r_ p e r fo r ma n c e _ c o n fig -o r x ch 4 -mp a th -p a ll
fi el d> p ee r_ p e r fo r ma n c e _ r e p o r t -o r x ch 4 -a 1 0 0 -r 1
field>
4.
Enter the command to return all active alarms of the Base Radio. At the
Þeld> prompt, type:
fi e l d> a la rm s_ o fa u lt_ h n d lr
field>
NOTE
If the command displays alarms, refer to the System
Troubleshooting section for corrective actions.
5.
As an option, you may check kit numbers for the receiver and other
modules. The following command returns this data. (The example below
speciÞes 800 MHz Quad Base Radios.) At the Þeld> prompt, type:
fi e l d> f v - o p latfo r m
field>
Equipment Disconnection
After verifying receiver operation, disconnect equipment as follows:
9-20
1.
Notice the Power Supply rocker switch, behind the front panel of the Power
Supply. Set the Power Supply rocker switch to the OFF (0) position. Turning
off this switch removes power from the Base Radio.
2.
Disconnect the RS-232 cable from the connector on the service computer.
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
Station Verification Procedures
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
3.
Disconnect the other end of the RS-232 cable from the RS-232 connector on
the front panel of the BRC.
4.
Disconnect the test cable from the RX1, RX2, and RX3 connectors located on
the backplane of the Base Radio.
5.
Connect the standard equipment cable to the RX1 connector.
6.
Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply rocker switch
to the ON (1) position. This step completes the Receiver VeriÞcation
Procedure for the receiver under test.
7.
Repeat the Receiver VeriÞcation Procedure for each Quad receiver in every
Base Radio in the EBTS.
9-21
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
Backplane Connectors
The Base Radio backplane includes all external equipment connections. Table 9-3
lists and describes the backplane connectors.
Backplane Connectors
Table 9-3
Connector
Module
Description
Connector Type
P1
EXBRC
Signal
168 Pin AMP Z-Pack
Futurebus
P2
RX1
Signal
72 Pin AMP Z-Pack
Futurebus
P3
RX1
RF
6 coax Harting Harpak
P4
RX2
Signal
72 Pin AMP Z-Pack
Futurebus
P5
RX2
RF
6 coax Harting Harpak
P6
RX3
Signal
72 Pin AMP Z-Pack
Futurebus
P7
RX3
RF
6 coax Harting Harpak
P8
RX4
Signal
72 Pin AMP Z-Pack
Futurebus
P9
RX4
RF
6 coax Harting Harpak
P10
PA
Signal
96 Pin EURO
P11
PS
Signal & Power
78 Pin AMP Teledensity
P12a
PS
-48 Vdc Power In
8 Pin AMP 530521-3
P13
EX
RF(EX from PA)
SMA blindmate
P14
EX
RF(EX to PA)
SMA blindmate
P15
External / EXBRC
Ethernet
BNC blindmate
P16
External / PA
RF (PA from EX)
SMA blindmate
P17
External / PA
RF (PA to EX)
SMA Blindmate
P18
External / PA
TX Output
SMA blindmate
P19
RX Branch 1
RF
SMA
P20
RX Branch 2
RF
SMA
P21
RX Branch 3
RF
SMA
P22b
External
RS232
Dsub-9
P23
External
Alarm
Dsub-25
P24
External
5MHz/1PPS
BNC
a. P12 is a cutout in the backplane with threaded inserts for securing the connector which
mates directly to the power supply.
b. P22 will not be placed on the Tornado backplane. However, the backplane shall be
designed with P22 to allow for reuse on other products.
9-22
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
Figure 9-4 shows the locations of the Base Radio external connections.
RX 3
AC POWER
GROUND
RX 2
DC POWER
RX 1
RE
ETHERNET A
5MHZ/1 PPS B
5MHZ/1 PPS A
IH S
CI T
ALARM
RS 232
PA OUT
CH
BLACK
EX
EX OUT
PA FB
PA IN
This port must be terminated by 50Ω load when configured for
2 Branch Diversity. Also, the rx_fru_config parameter must be set to R12.
Figure:9-4
GE
EBTS327
021997JNM
Base Radio Backplane Connectors
Backplane RF Connections
When the factory ships Base Radios as FRUs, each connection on the back of a
repeater has a designated color dot beside it. See Table 9-4. To Þnd where a cable
should be connected, match the label wrapped around the cable to the dot on the
back of the repeater.
Table: 9-4Color Codes for RF Connections on Rear of Base Radio
Connectors
TX
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
Color Dot Code
Orange
RX 1
Red
RX 2
Green
RX 3
Yellow
Ethernet
White
5 MHz/1 pps A
or Spare
Gray
9-23
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
Backplane Connector Pinouts
Table 9-5 lists the pin-outs for the Base Radio Controller boardÕs 168-pin P1
connector.
Table: 9-5EXBRC P1 Pinout, Signal and Power
9-24
Row
GND
3.3 Vdc
3.3 Vdc
NC
GND
3.3 Vdc
14.2 Vdc
14.2 Vdc
GND
3.3 Vdc
14.2 Vdc
14.2 Vdc
GND
GND
GND
GND
NC
NC
NC
NC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
16.8MHz_RX
16.8MHz_RX_RTN
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
5 MHz/1 PPS
3.3 Vdc
3.3 Vdc
10
NC
NC
NC
3.3 Vdc
11
TxD
CTS
DTR
BRG
12
RTS
RxD
DSR
CD
13
NC
NC
NC
3.3 Vdc
14
NC
NC
SHUTDOWN_
SLEEP_
15
PA_ENABLE
NC
28.6 Vdc
14.2 Vdc
16
NC
NC
NC
3.3 Vdc
17
EXT_GPI_1_
EXT_GPI_2_
EXT_GPO_1_
EXT_GPO_2_
18
BAT_STAT_
MTR_STAT_
EXT_VFWD
EXT_VREV
19
SPI_M3
SPI_M2
SPI_M1
SPI_M0
20
SPI_ENABLE
SPI_MOSI
SPI_MISO
SPI_CLK
21
SPI_A2
SPI_A1
SPI_A0
WP_
22
NC
RxRESET_
NC
NC
23
NC
Clock_SyncB_
NC
NC
24
GND
GND
3.3 Vdc
3.3 Vdc
25
SSI_Data_D
SSI_CLK_D
SSI_FS_D
3.3 Vdc
26
SSI_Data_D_RTN
SSI_CLK_D_RTN
NC
3.3 Vdc
27
GND
GND
3.3 Vdc
3.3 Vdc
28
DSPIb_MOSI
DSPIb_CLK
DSPIb_EN_1
DSPIb_EN_2
29
DSPIb_MOSI_RTN
DSPIb_CLK_RTN
DSPIb_EN_3
NC
30
GND
GND
3.3 Vdc
3.3 Vdc
31
GND
SSI_Data_C
SSI_CLK_C
SSI_FS_C
32
GND
SSI_Data_C_RTN
SSI_CLK_C_RTN
NC
33
NC
Clock_SyncA_
NC
NC
34
GND
GND
3.3 Vdc
3.3 Vdc
35
SSI_Data_B
SSI_CLK_B
SSI_FS_B
3.3 Vdc
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
Table: 9-5EXBRC P1 Pinout, Signal and Power
Row
36
SSI_Data_B_RTN
SSI_CLK_B_RTN
NC
3.3 Vdc
37
GND
GND
3.3 Vdc
3.3 Vdc
38
DSPIa_MOSI
DSPIa_CLK
DSPIa_EN_1
DSPIa_EN_2
39
DSPIa_MOSI_RTN
DSPIa_CLK_RTN
DSPIa_EN_3
NC
40
GND
GND
3.3 Vdc
3.3 Vdc
41
GND
SSI_Data_A
SSI_CLK_A
SSI_FS_A
42
GND
SSI_Data_A_RTN
SSI_CLK_A_RTN
NC
Table: 9-6EXBRC P13 Pinout, Exciter from PA
Coaxial
Description
Center
PA IN
Outer
GND
Table: 9-7EXBRC P14 Pinout, Exciter to PA
Coaxial
Description
Center
PA Feedback
Outer
GND
Table: 9-8EXBRC P15 Pinout, Ethernet
Coaxial
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
Description
Center
Ethernet
Outer
GND
9-25
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
RX1 Connections
Table 9-9
Row
NC
GND
GND
Clock_SyncA_
GND
DSPIa_MOSI_RTN
DSPIa_CLK_RTN
DSPIa_EN_1
GND
DSPIa_MOSI
DSPIa_CLK
DSPIa_EN_2
GND
GND
GND
GND
14.2
SSI_CLK_A_RTN
SSI_FS_B
SSI_CLK_B_RTN
14.2
SSI_CLK_A
SSI_FS_A
SSI_CLK_B
14.2
GND
GND
GND
14.2
SSI_Data_A_RTN
GND
SSI_Data_B
GND
SSI_Data_A
GND
SSI_Data_B_RTN
10
GND
NC
NC
NC
11
3.3
RxRESET_
GND (ID0)
GND (ID1)
12
3.3
WP_
SPI_A0
SPI_A1
13
3.3
SPI_MISO
SPI_CLK
SPI_A2
14
GND
SPI_M0
SPI_ENABLE
SPI_MOSI
15
GND
SPI_M1
SPI_M2
SPI_M3
16
GND
GND
GND
NC
17
GND
16.8MHz_RX
GND
NC (WB switch)
18
GND
16.8MHz_RX_RTN
GND
NC (MC switch)
Table 9-10
9-26
RX1 P2 Pinout, Signal and Power
RX1 P3 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection
Row
GND
GND
GND
RX3_EXP3
RX1_EXP3
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RX2_EXP2
RX1_EXP2
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RX Branch 1
RX1_EXP1
GND
GND
GND
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
RX2 Connections
Table 9-11
Row
NC
GND
GND
Clock_SyncA_
GND
DSPIa_MOSI_RTN
DSPIa_CLK_RTN
DSPIa_EN_3
GND
DSPIa_MOSI
DSPIa_CLK
DSPIa_EN_2
GND
GND
GND
GND
14.2
SSI_CLK_B_RTN
NC
NC
14.2
SSI_CLK_B
SSI_FS_B
NC
14.2
GND
GND
GND
14.2
SSI_Data_B_RTN
GND
NC
GND
SSI_Data_B
GND
NC
10
GND
NC
NC
NC
11
3.3
RxRESET_
NC (ID0)
GND (ID1)
12
3.3
WP_
SPI_A0
SPI_A1
13
3.3
SPI_MISO
SPI_CLK
SPI_A2
14
GND
SPI_M0
SPI_ENABLE
SPI_MOSI
15
GND
SPI_M2
SPI_M1
SPI_M3
16
GND
GND
GND
NC
17
GND
16.8MHz_RX
GND
NC (WB switch)
18
GND
16.8MHz_RX_RTN
GND
NC (MC switch)
Table 9-12
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
RX2 P4 Pinout, Signal and Power
RX2 P5 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection
Row
GND
GND
GND
RX3_EXP2
RX2_EXP3
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RX1_EXP1
RX2_EXP2
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RX Branch 2
RX2_EXP1
GND
GND
GND
12/12/2000
9-27
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
RX3 Connections
Table 9-13
Row
NC
GND
GND
Clock_SyncB_
GND
DSPIb_MOSI_RTN
DSPIb_CLK_RTN
DSPIb_EN_1
GND
DSPIb_MOSI
DSPIb_CLK
DSPIb_EN_2
GND
GND
GND
GND
14.2
SSI_CLK_C_RTN
SSI_FS_D
SSI_CLK_D_RTN
14.2
SSI_CLK_C
SSI_FS_C
SSI_CLK_D
14.2
GND
GND
GND
14.2
SSI_Data_C_RTN
GND
SSI_Data_D
GND
SSI_Data_C
GND
SSI_Data_D_RTN
10
GND
NC
NC
NC
11
3.3
RxRESET_
GND (ID0)
NC (ID1)
12
3.3
WP_
SPI_A0
SPI_A1
13
3.3
SPI_MISO
SPI_CLK
SPI_A2
14
GND
SPI_M2
SPI_ENABLE
SPI_MOSI
15
GND
SPI_M1
SPI_M0
SPI_M3
16
GND
GND
GND
NC
17
GND
16.8MHz_RX
GND
GND (WB switch)
18
GND
16.8MHz_RX_RTN
GND
NC (MC switch)
Table 9-14
9-28
RX3 P6 Pinout, Signal and Power
RX3 P7 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection
Row
GND
GND
GND
RX1_EXP2
RX3_EXP3
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RX2_EXP1
RX3_EXP2
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RX Branch 3
RX3_EXP1
GND
GND
GND
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
RX4 Connections
Table 9-15
Row
NC
GND
GND
Clock_SyncB_
GND
DSPIb_MOSI_RTN
DSPIb_CLK_RTN
DSPIb_EN_3
GND
DSPIb_MOSI
DSPIb_CLK
DSPIb_EN_2
GND
GND
GND
GND
14.2
SSI_CLK_D_RTN
NC
NC
14.2
SSI_CLK_D
SSI_FS_D
NC
14.2
GND
GND
GND
14.2
SSI_Data_D_RTN
GND
NC
GND
SSI_Data_D
GND
NC
10
GND
NC
NC
NC
11
3.3
RxRESET_
NC (ID0)
NC (ID1)
12
3.3
WP_
SPI_A0
SPI_A1
13
3.3
SPI_MISO
SPI_CLK
SPI_A2
14
GND
SPI_M0
SPI_ENABLE
SPI_MOSI
15
GND
SPI_M3
SPI_M2
SPI_M1
16
GND
GND
GND
NC
17
GND
16.8MHz_RX
GND
NC (WB switch)
18
GND
16.8MHz_RX_RTN
GND
GND (MC switch)
Table 9-16
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
RX4 P8 Pinout, Signal and Power
RX4 P9 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection
Row
GND
GND
GND
RX1_EXP3
NC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RX2_EXP3
NC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RX3_EXP1
NC
GND
GND
GND
12/12/2000
9-29
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
PA Connections
Table 9-17
Row
PA P10 Pinout, Signal and Power
SPI_ENABLE
GND
28.6 Vdc
GND
GND
28.6 Vdc
SPI_A0
GND
28.6 Vdc
GND
GND
28.6 Vdc
SPI_A1
GND
28.6 Vdc
GND
GND
28.6 Vdc
SPI_A2
GND
28.6 Vdc
GND
GND
28.6 Vdc
SPI_M0
GND
28.6 Vdc
10
GND
GND
28.6 Vdc
11
SPI_M1
GND
28.6 Vdc
12
GND
GND
28.6 Vdc
13
SPI_M2
GND
28.6 Vdc
14
GND
GND
28.6 Vdc
15
SPI_M3
GND
28.6 Vdc
16
GND
GND
28.6 Vdc
17
SPI_MISO
GND
28.6 Vdc
18
GND
GND
28.6 Vdc
19
SPI_MOSI
GND
28.6 Vdc
20
GND
GND
28.6 Vdc
21
SPI_CLK
GND
28.6 Vdc
22
GND
3.3 Vdc
28.6 Vdc
23
WP*
3.3 Vdc
28.6 Vdc
24
GND
GND
28.6 Vdc
25
PA_ENABLE
GND
28.6 Vdc
26
GND
14.2 Vdc
28.6 Vdc
27
GND
14.2 Vdc
28.6 Vdc
28
GND
14.2 Vdc
28.6 Vdc
29
GND
14.2 Vdc
28.6 Vdc
30
GND
28.6 Vdc
28.6 Vdc
31
GND
28.6 Vdc
28.6 Vdc
32
GND
28.6 Vdc
28.6 Vdc
Table: 9-18EXBRC P16 Pinout, PA from Exciter
Coaxial
9-30
Description
Center
PA IN
Outer
GND
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
Table: 9-19EXBRC P17 Pinout, PA to Exciter
Coaxial
Description
Center
PA Feedback
Outer
GND
Table: 9-20EXBRC P18 Pinout, PA RF OUT
Coaxial
Description
Center
PA RF OUT
Outer
GND
External Connections
Table: 9-21Backplane Coaxial and DC
Signal
P12
-48 Vdc Power
P13
EX Out
P14
Feedback
P15
Ethernet
P16
PA In
P17
PA Feedback
P18
PA RF OUT
P19
RX Branch 1
P20
RX Branch 2
P21
RX Branch 3
P24
5 MHz/1 PPS
Table: 9-22Backplane Alarm 25Pin Dsub (P23)
Alarm Signal
EXT_GPI_1_
EXT_GPO_1_
GND
EXT_GPI_2_
EXT_GPO_2_
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
9-31
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
Table: 9-22Backplane Alarm 25Pin Dsub (P23)
Alarm Signal
10
GND
11
12
13
14
15
16
GND
17
BAT_STAT_
18
MTR_STAT_
19
EXT_VFWD
20
EXT_VREV
21
GND
22
GND
23
24
25
GND
Table: 9-23Backplane RS-232 9 Pin Dsub (P22)
RS-232 Signal
9-32
CD
RxD
TxD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
BRG*
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
PS Connections
Table: 9-24PS Power and Signal (P11)
Pin
Description
Pin
Description
Pin
Description
GND (Plug In)
31
GND
32
3.3 Vdc
61
SPI_MOSI
GND
62
SPI_CLK
GND
33
GND
63
N.C.
28.6 Vdc
34
GND
64
N.C.
28.6 Vdc
35
GND
65
N.C.
28.6 Vdc
36
GND
66
N.C.
28.6 Vdc
37
GND
67
SPI_A0
28.6 Vdc
38
GND
68
SPI_A1
28.6 Vdc
39
GND
69
SPI_M2
10
28.6 Vdc
40
GND
70
SPI_M3
11
28.6 Vdc
41
GND
71
SPI_M1
12
28.6 Vdc
42
GND
72
SLEEP_
13
28.6 Vdc
43
GND
73
SPI_M0
14
28.6 Vdc
44
GND
74
WP_
15
28.6 Vdc
45
GND
75
SPI_A2
16
14.2 Vdc
46
GND
76
GND
17
14.2 Vdc
47
GND
77
GND
18
14.2 Vdc
48
GND
78
GND
19
14.2 Vdc
49
GND
20
14.2 Vdc
50
GND
21
14.2 Vdc
51
GND
14.2 Vdc
52
GND
23
14.2 Vdc
53
GND
24
3.3 Vdc
54
NC (FAN CONTROL)
25
3.3 Vdc
55
N.C.
26
3.3 Vdc
56
N.C.
27
3.3 Vdc
57
SHUTDOWN_
28
3.3 Vdc
58
NC (Power sharing)
29
3.3 Vdc
59
SPI_ENABLE
30
3.3 Vdc
60
SPI_MISO
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
12/12/2000
9-33
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Channel BR Backplane
Table: 9-2548 Vdc Battery Power (P12)
9-34
Pin
Description
Description
Pin
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY
- BATTERY (RTN)
- BATTERY (RTN)
- BATTERY (RTN)
- BATTERY (RTN)
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Base Radio Signals
QUAD Base Radio Signals
Table 9-26 lists and describes signals for the QUAD Base Radio .
Table: 9-26QUAD Base Radio Signal Descriptions
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
Signal Name
Description
28.6 Vdc
28.6 Vdc output from PS
14.2 Vdc
14.2 Vdc output from PS
3.3 Vdc
3.3 Vdc output from PS
GND
Station Ground
RX Branch 1
RX Branch 1 from RFDS
50 Ω
RX Branch 2
RX Branch 2 from RFDS
50 Ω
RX Branch 3
RX Branch 3 from RFDS
50 Ω
RX1_EXP1
RX1 (branch 1) expansion output 1
50 Ω
RX1_EXP2
RX1 (branch 1) expansion output 2
50 Ω
RX1_EXP3
RX1 (branch 1) expansion output 3
50 Ω
RX2_EXP1
RX2 (branch 2) expansion output 1
50 Ω
RX2_EXP2
RX2 (branch 2) expansion output 2
50 Ω
RX2_EXP3
RX2 (branch 2) expansion output 3
50 Ω
RX3_EXP1
RX3 (branch 3) expansion output 1
50 Ω
RX3_EXP2
RX3 (branch 3) expansion output 2
50 Ω
50 Ω
RX3_EXP3
RX3 (branch 3) expansion output 3
5 MHz/1 PPS
5 MHz/1 PPS reference to the BRC
SPI_ENABLE
Host Centric SPI Enable
SPI_MISO
Host Centric SPI MISO
SPI_MOSI
Host Centric SPI MOSI
SPI_CLK
Host Centric SPI Clock
SPI_A0
Host SPI Device Address Line A0
SPI_A1
Host SPI Device Address Line A1
SPI_A2
Host SPI Device AddressLine A2
SPI_M0
Host SPI Module Address Line M0
SPI_M1
Host SPI Module Address Line M1
SPI_M2
Host SPI Module Address Line M2
SPI_M3
Host SPI Module Address Line M3
WP_
Write Protect (active low)
PA_ENABLE
Turns off PA bias with active low
SLEEP_
Sleep signal from PS
SHUTDOWN_
PS reset line from BRC
CD
RS232 Carrier Detect
RxD
RS232 RX Data
12/12/2000
Special
9-35
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
QUAD Base Radio Signals
Table: 9-26QUAD Base Radio Signal Descriptions
9-36
Signal Name
Description
TxD
RS232 TX Data
DTR
RS232 Data Terminal Ready
DSR
RS232 Data Set Ready
RTS
RS232 Request to Send
CTS
RS232 Clear to Send
Special
BRG
Baud Rate Generator
RxRESET_
Reset Signal to RX modules
16.8MHz_RX
16.8 MHz reference to RX
differential
16.8MHz_RX_RTN
16.8 MHz reference to RX return
differential
Clock_SyncA_
Clock Sync signal to RX1 & RX2
For Abacus III
Clock_SyncB_
Clock Sync signal to RX3 & RX4
For Abacus III
SSI_Data_A
RX Data from RX module 1
differential
SSI_Data_A_RTN
RX Data from RX module 1return
differential
SSI_Data_B
RX Data from RX module 2
differential
SSI_Data_B_RTN
RX Data from RX module 2 return
differential
SSI_Data_C
RX Data from RX module 3
differential
SSI_Data_C_RTN
RX Data from RX module 3 return
differential
SSI_Data_D
RX Data from RX module 4
differential
SSI_Data_D_RTN
RX Data from RX module 4 return
differential
SSI_CLK_A
RX Clock from RX module 1
differential
SSI_CLK_A_RTN
RX Clock from RX module 1 return
differential
SSI_CLK_B
RX Clock from RX module 2
differential
SSI_CLK_B_RTN
RX Clock from RX module 2 return
differential
SSI_CLK_C
RX Clock from RX module 3
differential
SSI_CLK_C_RTN
RX Clock from RX module 3 return
differential
SSI_CLK_D
RX Clock from RX module 4
differential
SSI_CLK_D_RTN
RX Clock from RX module 4 return
differential
SSI_FS_A
RX Frame Sync from RX module 1
SSI_FS_B
RX Frame Sync from RX module 2
SSI_FS_C
RX Frame Sync from RX module 3
SSI_FS_D
RX Frame Sync from RX module 4
DSPIa_En_1
DSPa SPI RX1 Abacus enable
DSPIa_En_3
DSPa SPI RX2 Abacus enable
DSPIa_En_2
DSPa SPI RX1 & RX2 SGC enable
DSPIb_En_1
DSPb SPI RX3 Abacus enable
DSPIb_En_3
DSPb SPI RX4 Abacus enable
DSPIb_En_2
DSPb SPI RX3 & RX4 SGC enable
DSPIa_MOSI
DSPa SPI MOSI
differential
DSPIa_MOSI_RTN
DSPa SPI MOSI return
differential
DSPIb_MOSI
DSPb SPI MOSI
differential
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
QUAD Base Radio Signals
Table: 9-26QUAD Base Radio Signal Descriptions
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5E02- D
Signal Name
Description
Special
DSPIb_MOSI_RTN
DSPb SPI MOSI return
differential
DSPIa_CLK
DSPa SPI Clock
differential
DSPIa_CLK_RTN
DSPa SPI CLK return
differential
DSPIb_CLK
DSPb SPI Clock
differential
DSPIb_CLK_RTN
DSPb SPI CLK return
differential
MTR_STAT_
External Wattmeter Status
BAT_STAT_
Battery Status
EXT_VFWD
External Wattmeter Forward meter
EXT_VREV
External Wattmeter Reflected meter
EXT_GPO_1_
General purpose output 1
EXT_GPO_2_
General purpose output 2
EXT_GPI_1_
General purpose input 1
EXT_GPI_2_
General purpose input 2
NC
Not connected
12/12/2000
reserved
9-37
800/900/1500 MHz Base Radios
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
This Page Intentionally
Left Blank
9-38
68P81095E02-D 12/12/2000
Appendix A
A Acronyms
A/D
Analog-to-Digital
CC
Control Cabinet
Amperes
CD
Carrier Detect
AC
Alternating Current
cd
change directory
ACT
active
CLK
Clock
ADA
Americans with Disabilities Act
CLT
Controller
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
cm
centimeter
AIC
Ampere Interrupting Capacity
CMOS
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal (Keep Alive)
Complementary Metal Oxide
Semiconductor
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
CPU
Central Processing Unit
ASCII
American National Standard Code for
Information Interchange
CSMA/CD
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with
Collision Detect
ASIC
Application SpeciÞc Integrated Circuit
CTI
Coaxial Transceiver Interface
Aux
auxiliary
CTL
Control (Base Radio Control)
avg
average
CTS
Clear-to-Send
AWG
American Wire Gauge
D/A
Digital-to-Analog
bd
baud
DAP
Dispatch Application Processor
BDM
Background Debug Mode
DB-15
15-pin D-subminiature
BER
Bit Error Rate
DB-9
9-pin D-subminiature
BERT
Bit Error Rate Test
dB
Decibel
BMR
Base Monitor Radio
dBc
Decibels relative to carrier
BNC
Baby ÒNÓ Connector
dBm
Decibels relative to 1mW
BPV
Bipolar Variation
DC
Direct Current
BR
Base Radio
DCE
Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment
BRC
Base Radio Controller
DCSPLY
DC Supply
BSC
Base Site Controller
DDM
Dual Device Module
BTU
British Thermal Unit
deg
degree
BW
bandwidth
DIN
Deutsche Industrie-Norm
C/N + 1
Carrier Power to Noise + Interference
Ratio
DIP
Dual In-line Package
div
division
Network Solutions Sector
6 8 P 8 1 0 9 5 E06- B
4/1/2000
1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196
A-39
Appendix A Acronyms
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
DMA
Direct Memory Access
HSO
High Stability Oscillator
DOP
Dilution of Precision
HVAC
Heating/Ventilation/Air Conditioning
DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory
Hz
Hertz
DSP
Digital Signal Processor
I/O
Input/Output
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
IC
Integrated Circuit
DTTA
Duplexed Tower-Top AmpliÞer
iDEN
integrated Dispatch Enhanced Network
DVM
Digital Volt Meter
IEEE
E1
European telephone multiplexing
standard
Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers
IF
intermediate frequency
EAS
Environmental Alarm System
iMU
iDEN Monitor Unit
E-NET
Ethernet
in
inches
EBTS
Enhanced Base Transceiver System
in
injection
EGB
Exterior Ground Bar
ISA
Industry Standard Architecture
EIA
Electronics Industry Association
iSC
integrated Site Controller
EMI
Electro-Magnetic Interference
kg
kilogram
EPROM
Erasable Programmable
Memory
kHz
kiloHertz
LAN
Local Area Network
EEPROM
Electronically Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory
LANIIC
Local Area Network Interface IC
ERFC
Expansion RF Cabinet
LAPD
Link Access Procedure D-Channel
ESI
Ethernet Serial Interface
lbs
pounds
ESMR
Enhanced Special Mobile Radio
LDM
Linear Driver Module
EX
Exciter
LED
Light Emitting Diode
FB
feedback
LFM
Linear Final Module
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
LIU
Line Interface Unit
FIFO
First-In, First-Out
LLC
Link Layer Controller
FNE
Fixed Network Equipment
LNA
Low Noise AmpliÞer
freq
frequency
LO
Local Oscillator
FRU
Field Replaceable Unit
LOS
Loss of Signal
GFI
Ground Fault Interrupter
MAU
Media Access Unit
GND
ground
max
maximum
GPS
Global Positioning System
MC
Multicoupler
GPSR
Global Positioning System Receiver
MGB
Master Ground Bar
HDLC
High-level Data Link
MGN
Multi-Grounded Neutral
HSMR
High Elevation Specialized Mobile Radio
MHz
MegaHertz
min
minimum
A-40
Read
Only
68P81095E06- B
4/1/200 0
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
Appendix A Acronyms
min
minute
PS
Power Supply
MISO
Master In/Slave Out
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
mm
millimeter
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
MMI
Man-Machine-Interface
pwr
power
MOSI
Master Out/Slave In
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
MPM
Multiple Peripheral Module
QRSS
Quasi Random Signal Sequence
MPS
Metro Packet Switch
Qty
Quantity
MS
Mobile Station
R1
Receiver #1
ms
millisecond
R2
Receiver #2
MSC
Mobile Switching Center
R3
Receiver #3
MSO
Mobile Switching OfÞce
RAM
Random Access Memory
MST
Modular Screw Terminals
RCVR
Receiver
mV
milliVolt
Ref
Reference
mW
milliWatt
RF
Radio Frequency
N.C.
Normally Closed
RFC
RF Cabinet
N.O.
Normally Open
RFDS
RF Distribution System
NEC
National Electric Code
RFS
RF System
NIC
Network Interface Card
ROM
Read Only Memory
no.
number
RPM
Revolutions Per Minute
NTM
NIC Transition Module
RSSI
Received Signal Strength Indication
NTWK
Network
RTN
Return
OMC
Operations and Maintenance Center
RU
Rack Unit
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Act
Rx
Receive
PA
Power AmpliÞer
RXDSP
Receive Digital Signal Processor
PAL
Programmable Array Logic
SCI
Serial Communications Interface
PC
Personal Computer
SCON
VME System Controller
PCCH
Primary Control Channel
SCRF
PDOP
Position Dilution of Precision
Stand-alone Control and RF Cabinet
(conÞguration)
pF
picoFarad
SCSI
Small Computer System Interface
PLL
Phase Locked Loop
sec
second
P/N
Part Number
SGC
Software Gain Control
P/O
Part Of
SINAD
Signal Plus Noise Plus Distortion to Noise
Plus Distortion Radio
ppm
parts per million
SMART
PPS
Pulse Per Second
Systems Management Analysis, Research
and Test
6 8 P 8 1 095E06- B
4/1/2000
A-41
Appendix A Acronyms
EBTS System Manual - Vol 2
SPI
Serial Peripheral Interface
Vac
Volts - alternating current
SQE
Signal Quality Error
VCO
Voltage Controlled Oscillator
SRAM
Static Random Access Memory
VCXO
Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator
SRC
Subrate Controller
Vdc
Volts - direct current
SRI
Site Reference Industry standard
VFWD
Voltage representation of Forward Power
SRIB
SMART Radio Interface Box
VME
Versa-Module Eurocard
SRRC
Single Rack, Redundant Controller
(conÞguration)
Vp-p
Voltage peak-to-peak
VREF
Voltage representation of Reßected Power
SRSC
Single Rack, Single Controller
(conÞguration)
VSWR
Voltage Standing Wave Radio
SS
Surge Suppressor
Watt
SSC
System Status Control
WDT
Watchdog Timer
SSI
Synchronous Serial Interface
WP
Write Protect
ST
Status
WSAPD
Worldwide Systems and Aftermarket
Products Division
STAT
Status
Std
Standard
S/W
Software
T1
North american telephone mutiplexing
standard
TB
Terminal Board
TDM
Time Division Multiplex
telco
telephone company
SCON
VME System Controller
TISIC
TDMA Infrastructure Support IC
TSI
Time Slot Interface
TSI
Time Slot Interchange
TTA
Tower-Top AmpliÞer
TTL
Transistor - Transistor Logic
Tx
Transmit
TXD
Transmit Data
TXDSP
Transmit Digital Signal Processor
Txlin
Tranlin IC
typ
typical
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
A-42
Volts
68P81095E06- B
4/1/200 0
Index
Appendix A Index
Base Radio
40W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier TLF2020 (version 1580A)
Testing/verification (Base Radio section) ............................................................................10-11, 10-23
40W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier TLF2020 (version 1580B)
Testing/verification (Base Radio section) ............................................................................10-11, 10-23
60W, 900 MHz Power Amplifier CLN1355A
Testing/verification (Base Radio section) .......................................................................................10-19
70W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier TLN3335 (version CTF1040)
Testing/verification (Base Radio section) .........................................................................................12-2
Testing/verification (Base Radio section) .......................................................................................10-15
70W, 800 MHz Power Amplifier TLN3335 (version CTF1050)
Testing/verification (Base Radio section) .........................................................................................12-2
Testing/verification (Base Radio section) .......................................................................................10-15
800 MHz, 3X Receiver CLN1283 and 900 MHz, 3X Receiver CLN1356
Diversity uses and cautions (Base Radio section).....................................................................9-3, 9-12
Overview (Base Radio section) ....................................................................................................9-1, 9-12
Replacement compatibility (Base Radio section) ..............................................................................9-2
Theory of operation (Base Radio section) ..................................................................................9-5, 9-14
AC Power Supply
Controls and indicators (Base Radio section) .....................................................................................8-1
Overview (Base Radio section) .............................................................................................................8-1
Theory of operation (Base Radio section) ...........................................................................................8-3
Backplane connector information (Base Radio section) ...........................................................10-35, 11-22
Base Radio Controller
Controls and indicators (Base Radio section) ............................................................................2-3, 2-12
Theory of operation (Base Radio section) ..................................................................................2-5, 2-15
Base Radio/Base Radio FRU replacement procedures (Base Radio section)..........................10-5, 11-5
Controls and indicators (Base Radio section) ....................................................................................1-5, 1-10
DC Power Supply (Base Radio section)
Controls and indicators ....................................................................................................................7-1, 7-5
Description .........................................................................................................................................7-1, 7-4
Theory of operation ..........................................................................................................................7-3, 7-6
Exciter
Description (Base Radio section) ...................................................................................................5-1, 5-7
Theory of operation (Base Radio section) ....................................................................................5-3, 5-8
Overview (Base Radio section) ................................................................................................................1-4, 1-9
Performance specifications (Base Radio section) .............................................................................1-5, 1-10
Station verification procedures (Base Radio section) ..................................................................10-9, 11-10
Theory of operation (Base Radio section)...........................................................................................1-7, 1-12
Troubleshooting (Base Radio section) ...............................................................................................10-1, 11-1
Network Solutions Sector
68P81095E69-D 11/10/2000-UP
1301 E. Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196
Index-1
Index
EBTS Base Radios
Maintenance Philosophy (Foreword) ................................................................................................................... x
Motorola Customer Support Center
Support Center address and phone number (Foreword) ........................................................................... x
Purpose of Manual (Foreword)............................................................................................................................. ix
Index-2
68P81095E69-D
11/10/2000

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Modify Date                     : 2001:01:15 20:45:24-06:00
Create Date                     : 2001:01:15 20:39:54-06:00
Title                           : Quad-BR_800_Tx_FCC_Filing.PDF
Author                          : kenw
Creator                         : Microsoft Word - Quad-BR_800_Tx_FCC_Filing.doc
Producer                        : Acrobat PDFWriter 4.0 for Windows NT
Page Count                      : 228

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Motorola Solutions 89FC5794 Enhanced Base Transceiver System (EBTS) User Manual Quad BR 800 Tx FCC Filing

Motorola Solutions, Inc. Enhanced Base Transceiver System (EBTS) Quad BR 800 Tx FCC Filing

Exhibit D Users Manual

FCC ID Filing: ABZ89FC5794

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation